PC/HOST File Transfer and Terminal Emulator Program

\\ ""
Productivity Family
------------...
....~
...
~---------~~----------
~
~
-----------....
~
---------....
~
....
..
~------
~---
~
~
-t:·\oI!,' . '"".:-:~: ; :~<;>" ',i,: (: -:: ., ~~" ::.,:,.~.:.:!: ;:":'<;'
; ::.~(?::~·~~::~.;?i~·~:,[;,:~!·~:.;:~:-·,~.?J~~~~;-~~'~~~y~rt:.'~<~;:'~L:D:
f"Aproductlvlty :tool'that'I.~.'%
/the IBM Personal Computer};:{);%
,!:iemulate an IBM 310t Display;;:~
c:Terminal and transfer Jiles to,:';
various hosts using' the I
.
'.370a .Network Conversi
~UnitorIBM.3710
a-p
L;·NetworkController
"". '. ,,'. "' . ' ,,' . ". ....
. . ·/·. ;,r". '
~;c>E';,,,,,,
PC/HOST File Transfer and
Terminal Emulator Program
User's Guide and Reference
--.-- ------- . ---------,
-
- --
Personal
Computer
Software
First Edition (September, 1986)
The program product described in this manual, and all licensed
material available for it, is provided by IBM under terms of the
Agreement for IBM Licensed Programs.
Any reference to an IBM program product in this document is not
intended to state or imply that only IBM's program product may be
used. Any functionally equivalent program may be used instead.
It is possible that this material may contain reference to, or
information about, IBM products (machines and programs),
programming, or services that are not announced in your country.
Such references or information must not be construed to mean that
IBM intends to announce such IBM products, programming, or services
in your country.
Products are not stocked at the address below.
A form for your comments is provided at the back of this publication.
If the form has been removed, comments may be addressed to IBM
Corporation, Department E02, P.O. Box 12195, Research Triangle Park,
North Carolina 27709. IBM may use or distribute any of the
information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation whatever. You may, of course, continue to
use the information you supply.
c
Copyright International Business :Ylachines Corporation 1986
About This Manual
This manual describes how to use the PC/HOST File
Transfer and Terminal Emulator Program (FTTERM).
Who Should Read This Manual
Users of the PC/HOST File Transfer and Terminal
Emulator Program (FTTERM) should read this manual for
instructions on:
•
Making a working copy of FTTERM
•
Communicating with a host computer, using an IBM
Personal Computer (PC) as an IBM 3101 Display
Terminal
•
Transferring files between a PC and a host computer
•
Creating and modifying configuration files.
System administrators for an IBM 3708 Network
Conversion Unit or an IBl\1 3710 Network Controller
using an 8-Port Asynchronous Adapter (8-P i\) should read
this manual for instructions on creating or modifying
terminal definitions that take advantage of FTTERM
capabilities.
111
What You Need to Know
To use FTTERM, you do not need to have any particular
technical knowledge, but you do need to be familiar with
the following subj ects:
•
All users. You need to be familiar with:
IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System
(DOS), particularly its file system, file naming
conventions, and basic DOS commands like
FORMAT and COpy
General PC operation, including using the
keyboard, handling diskettes, and loading DOS
The host system, particularly the system type (such
as VMjCMS), logon procedure, file system, and file
naming conventions
The characteristics of the communication line,
including:
Line speed
Parity type
Number of stop bits.
You can obtain this information from the host
system administrator. For online information
services, consult the documentation provided by the
service organization.
•
3708 and 3710 8-PA users. You need to be familiar
with:
Which ports you can access, and their respective
communication line characteristics
The logon procedure for the 3708 or 3710 8-PA.
IV
You can obtain this information from the system
administrator for the 3708 or 3710 8-PA.
•
Modem users. You need to be familiar with the
modem's setup procedures, diagnostic procedures, and
command set.
What You Will Find in This
Manual
This manual contains two parts:
"Part 1. PC/HOST File Transfer and Terminal
Emulator Program (FTTERM) User's Guide" contains
the following chapters:
Chapter 1, "Introduction," introduces FTTERM and
its functions. It also lists the hardware and software
that you need to run FTTERM.
Chapter 2, "Preparing"to Use FTTERM,-" describeshow to make a working copy of the FTTERM program
diskette.
Chapter 3, "Using FTTERM," describes how to load
FTTERM, start a host session, and switch between
FTTERM functions. It also describes various details
of using FTTERM, such as accessing the help screens,
loading a configuration file, and switching between
concurrent and nonconcurrent modes.
Chapter 4, "Transferring Files Using the Protocol
Conversion Method," provides step-by-step
procedures for transferring files with SNA hosts
through a 3708 or 3710 8-PA operating in protocol
conversion mode. 1 (See "Terminology" on page 1-4 for
Technical note: In protocol conversion mode, the 3708 or 3710 8-PA
converts communications between the host (SNA protocol) and the
PC, which is emulating a 3101-type display device. The PC
v
explanations of SNA host and protocol conversion.}
This chapter also explains the file transfer options for
each type of SNA host.
Chapter 5, "Transferring Files Using the Native
Emulation Method," provides step-by-step procedures
for transferring files with SNA hosts or ASCII hosts
using native 3101 emulation. 2 (See "Terminology" on
page 1-4 for explanations of ASCII host and native
emulation.) This chapter also describes the
FILECONV program that converts files between
binary and ASCII formats.
"Part 2. PC/HOST File Transfer and Terminal
Emulator Program (FTTERM) Reference," contains
the following appendixes:
Appendix A, "File Transfer Messages," lists the
messages that FTTERM can display during file
transfer operations. It includes an explanation and a
recommended action for each message.
Appendix B, "FTTERM Menus," explains each item
on the File Transfer Main Menu and the File Transfer
Main Menu - Native Emulation.
communicates with the 3708 or 3710 8-PA using a start/stop protocol
and the ASCII character set. The '3708 or 3710 8-PA, in addition to
performing protocol conversion and ASCII/EBCDIC conversion,
enables the PC to be used as a 3270-type display device.
Technical note: In native emulation mode, FTTERM transfers files
line-by-line using a start/stop protocol and the ASCII character set.
If the PC is communicating through a 3708 or 3710 8-PA, the device
operates in one of the following modes:
VI
•
For ASCII hosts. the 3708 or 3710 8-PA operates in ASCII
passthru mode. It performs no protocol or data conversion.
•
For SNA hosts, the 3708 or 3710 8-PA operates in protocol
enveloping mode. It performs ASCII/EBCDIC conversion and
attaches SNA headers to host-bound records. It removes SNA
headers from PC-bound records.
Appendix C, "Creating and Modifying
Configuration Files," describes how to use the
FTSETUP program to create and modify configuration
files, and to select a default configuration file.
Appendix D, "Sample Configuration Files,"
includes specific information about each of the sample
configuration files supplied with FTTERM.
Appendix E, "IBM 3708 and 3710 8-PA
Considerations," provides information about terminal
definitions for the 3708 and 3710 8-PA that support
FTTERM. This information is intended for the system
administrator of the 3708 or 3710 8-P A.
Appendix F, "3101 Emulation Comparison,"
contains reference information about FTTERM's 3101
terminal emulation program.
Appendix G, "National Language
Considerations," explains the character translation
tables used by FTTERM and the host file transfer
programs to support national language PC keyboards.
It lists the standard host character translation tables.
Appendix H, "Using FTTERM with ROLM Data
Communications Equipment," describes how to use
FTTERM with ROLM equipment, including how to
configure the ROLM equipment.
Appendix I, "Service Registration," contains a
form to register your copy of the FTTERM program.
Please fill it in and mail the original to the address on
the reverse side of the form. No postage is necessary if
mailed in the United States.
Vll
Related Manuals
Manuals related to PC operation and DOS are:
•
IBM Personal Computer Guide to Operations
•
IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System
Manuals that contain information that is related to
FTTERM's 3101 emulation program are:
•
An Introduction to the IBM 3101 Display Terminal,
GA1B-2051
•
IBM 3101 Display Terminal Description, GA1B-2033.
The manual that provides technical information about file
transfers with CICS hosts is:
•
CICS/VS 3270-PC File Transfer Program Program
Description/Operations Manual, SH20-6306.
Manuals that provide technical information about file
transfers with VSE/SP hosts using Intelligent·Workstation
Support (IWS) are:
•
•
•
VSE/ SP Planning, SC33-6177
VSE/ SP Messages and Codes, SC33-61B1
VSE/ SP System Use, SC33-6174.
Manuals that can help a system administrator customize
the FTTERM terminal definitions at the 370B are:
•
IBM 3708 Network Conversion Unit Planning,
GA27-3609
•
IBM 3708 Network Conversion Unit Configuration
Workbook, GA27-3656
•
IBM 3708 Network Conversion Unit Configuration
Reference, GA27-3726.
Vlll
Manuals that can help a system administrator create a
user defined terminal to support FTTERM at the 3710
8-PA are:
•
•
IBM 3710 Network Controller Planning, GA27-3431
IBM 3710 Network Controller Configuration Workbook,
GA27-3869.
When contacting online information services, refer to the
documentation provided by the service organization for
instructions on contacting the host, logging on and off,
and using the service.
IX
x
Contents
Part 1. PC/HOST File Transfer and Terminal
Emulator Program (FTTERM) User's Guide
Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Emulating a 3101 Display Terminal ........... 1-5
Regarding File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
File Transfer Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
File Transfer Sources and Destinations
1-6
File Transfer Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Additional FTTERM Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Concurrent and Nonconcurrent Mode ...... 1-8
Transferring Individual Files or Groups of Files 1-8
Help Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Auto-Dial Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Keyboard Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Color, Highlighting, Status Line, ~n<;i __MLU
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .--..... -1-11
National Language Character Set Support .. 1-11
ROLM CBX II Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
What You Need To Use FTTERM ........... 1-12
Required Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Required Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Chapter 2. Preparing to Use FTTERM . . . . . . . .
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a Working Copy of FTTERlvI .........
Procedure for One-Drive PCs .............
Procedure for Two-Drive Systems ..........
Procedure for Fixed Disk Systems ........
Selecting a Character Translation Table ......
Preparing and Selecting a Default Configuration
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3. Using FTTERM
2-1
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-8
2-12
2-15
2-17
3-1
Xl
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting FTTERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting a Host Session ....................
Special Instructions for Modem Users ......
Special Instructions for 3708 and 3710 8-P A
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After Starting a Host Session ............
Switching Between FTTERM Functions ......
The PC DOS Session ...................
The Host Session .....................
File Transfer Main Menus ..............
The Host Messages Screen ............ '..
Selecting Concurrent or Nonconcurrent Mode ..
Loading a Configuration File ...............
Displaying the Current Configuration File ..
Disconnecting from the Host ...............
Displaying FTTERM's Help Windows ........
Editing FTTERM Commands ...............
Using an AUTOEXEC.BAT File ............
Entering Commands from the DOS Prompt ..
Exiting from FTTERM ....................
Using FTTERM in Nonresident Mode ........
Using FTTERM with Other Resident Programs .
FTTERM Reserved Words .................
Chapter 4. Transferring Files Using the Protocol
Conversion ,Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Starting a File Transfer ..............
The File Transfer Main Menu ...............
Sending a File ............................
Entering a SEND Command ..............
Sending a PC DOS File to a Host File ......
Sending a PC DOS File to the PC Printer
Sending a PC DOS Screen to the PC Printer
Sending a Host Screen to a Host File ......
Sending a PC DOS Screen to a Host File ...
Receiving a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a RECEIVE Command ..........
Receiving a PC DOS File from a Host File ..
Receiving a PC DOS File from a PC DOS
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving a Host File to the PC Printer ....
Xll
3-3
3-3
3-6
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-22
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-26
3-26
4-1
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-6
4-6
4-8
4-15
4-17
4-18
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-24
4-29
4-30
Receiving a PC DOS File from a Host Screen 4-32
Receiving a Host Screen to the PC Printer .. 4-34
Using a Batch File to Transfer Multiple Files .. 4-35
Creating the Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Processing the Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Batch Transfer Status Messages .......... 4-37
Stopping the Batch File Processing ....... 4-39
Entering SEND and RECEIVE Commands in the
PC DOS Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Host Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
VM/CMS Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
MVS/TSO Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
CICS and IWS Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
SEND and RECEIVE Command Options ...... 4-48
Basic Options for VMjCMS and MVSjTSO
Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Basic Options for CICS and IWS Hosts ..... 4-50
Option Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Chapter 5. Transferring Files Using the Native
Emulation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
How Native Emulation Transfer Works ........ 5-3
Before Starting a File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Selecting a Terminal Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Using Full-Screen Host Programs - . -.--. -.- ...... - 5·4
The File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Saving Host Data at the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Stopping the Save Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Examples of Saving Host Data at the PC
5-11
Transmitting a PC File to a Host . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Stopping the Transmit Operation ......... 5-13
Example of Transmitting a PC File to a Host
5-14
Copying a Host Screen to a PC File or Printer
5-14
Stopping the Copy Operation ............ 5-15
Examples of Copying Host Screen Data
5-16
Using FILECONV When Transferring Binary
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Identifying ASCII and Binary Files ...... . 5-17
Starting FILECONV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Converting Binary Files to ASCII ........ . 5-19
Converting ASCII Files to Binary ........ . 5-20
XllI
Exiting From FILECONV ...............
FILECONV Messages ..................
5-21
5-21
Part 2. PC/HOST File Transfer and Terminal
Emulator Program (FTTERM) Reference
Appendix A. File Transfer Messages . . . . . . . . A-I
About this Appendix ..................... A-3
General FTTERM File Transfer Messages ..... A-3
IWS Host Messages (INWOOnnI) ............. A-21
VM/CMS, MVS/TSO, and CICS Host Messages
(TRANSnn) ........................... A-35
Appendix B. FTTERM Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About this Appendix ......................
The File Transfer Main Menu ...............
The File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation .............................
Appendix C. Creating and Modifying
Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About this Appendix ......................
Using the FTSETUP Screens ................
Displaying the FTSETUP Function Selection
Menu ..............................
Displaying FTSETUP's Help Windows ......
Selecting Screen Colors when Using FTSETUP
Creating a Configuration File ...............
Modifying an Existing Configuration File .....
Using the Configuration Worksheet ..........
Running in Protocol Conversion Mode? ....
Protocol Converter? ...................
Line Speed (Baud Rate) to be Used? .......
Half Duplex? .........................
Parity? .............................
Stop Bits? ...........................
Automatic New Line? ..................
Automatic Line Feed? ..................
Carriage Return'? .....................
Character Sent at End of Message? .......
Scrolling? ...........................
Prompt Character From Host? ...........
Start/Stop (XON/XOFF) Enabled? .........
XIV
B-1
B-3
B-3
B-9
C-l
C-3
C-6
C-6
C-7
C-8
C-8
C-12
C-13
C-16
C-17
C-17
C-17
C-18
C-18
C-18
C-19
C-19
C-19
C-19
C-20
C-20
Communications Port? ................ .
25 Line Terminal Definition in 3708 or 3710
8-PA? ............................ .
Host System? ....................... .
Inactivity Timeout (in Minutes)? ........ .
Extended Code for Switch to xxxx? ....... .
Name of Host File Transfer Command?
Would You Like to Change any of the Above
Entries? .......................... .
Would You Like to Define any Auto-Dial
Sequences? ........................ .
Would You Like to Modify any Key
Definitions? ........................ .
Defining Auto-Dial Sequences ............. .
Displaying the Auto-Dial Definition Menu ..
Adding an Auto-Dial Definition ......... .
Changing an Auto-Dial Definition ....... .
Deleting an Auto-Dial Definition ........ .
Listing the Auto-Dial Definitions ........ .
Quitting the Auto-Dial Definition Procedure
Defining the Keyboard ................... .
Default Keyboard Definitions ........... .
Displaying the Key Definition Menu ..... .
Adding or Modifying a Key Definition .... .
Deleting a Key Definition .............. .
Finding a Key Definition .............. .
Listing the Key Definitions ............ .
Quitting the Key Definition Procedure .... .
Selecting a Default Configuration File ...... .
Suppressing Selected Prompts ............. .
FTSETUP ~lessages ..................... .
C-20
C-21
C-21
C-21
C-22
C-23
C-23
C-24
C-24
C-24
C-25
C-26
C-28
C-29
C-30
C-30
C-30
C-31
C-34
C-35
C-38
C-39
C-40
C-40
C-41
C-43
C-43
Appendix D. Sample Configuration Files .... . D-l
About this Appendix .................... . D-3
Understanding the Sample Configuration Files . D-4
IBM3708.SET .......................... . D-5
DOWJONES.SET (Dow Jones News Service) .. . D-IO
SOURCE.SET (The Source) ............... . D-12.
Appendix E. IBM 3708 and 3710 8-PA
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
About this Appendix ...................... E-3
Predefined Terminal Selections for 3708 ........ E-4
xv
Changing the Color Selections ............... E-4
Examples of Color Escape Sequences ....... E-7
Changing Highlight Selections .............. E-8
Status Line Support ....................... E-9
Multiple LU Support ..... ; ................ E-9
Reserved Key Sequences .................. E-l1
Appendix F. 3101 Emulation Comparison . . . . .
F-l
Appendix G. National Language Considerations
About this Appendix .....................
Why You Select a Character Translation Table.
VM/CMS and MVS/TSO Hosts .............
CICS and IWS Hosts .....................
G-l
G-3
G-3
G-4
G-7
Appendix H. Using FTTERM with ROLM Data
Communications Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About this Appendix .....................
Configuring ROLM Equipment .............
ROLM Integrated Personal Computer Interface
(IPCI) Card .........................
ROLMphone Data Communications Module
(DCM) .............................
ROLM Data Terminal Interface (DTI) ......
ROLM Juniper II Feature .........
Using FTTERM with ROLM Equipment ......
ROLM IPCI Card, ROLMphone DCM, and
ROLM DTI .........................
ROLM Juniper II Feature ...............
r
• . • - • •- . . .
H-l
H-3
H-3
H-3
.
H-3
H-4
H-4
H-5
H-5
H-6
Appendix I. Service Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . I-I
.. . . . .. .. . . ..... . . . . ...... . ..
X-I
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-7
Glossary
XVI
Part 1. PC/HOST File Transfer
and Terminal Emulator Program
(FTTERM) User's Guide
Chapter 1. Introduction
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Emulating a 3101 Display Terminal ........... 1-5
Regarding File Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
File Transfer l'vlethods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
File Transfer Sources and Destinations
1-6
File Transfer Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Additional FTTERM Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Concurrent and Nonconcurrent Mode ...... 1-8
Transferring Individual Files or Groups of Files 1-8
Help Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Auto-Dial Capability ....... ,............ 1-10
Keyboard Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Color, Highlighting, Status Line, and MLU
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
National Language Character Set Support .. 1-11
ROLM CBX II Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
What You Need To Use FTTERM ........... 1-12
Required Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Required Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-1
Notes:
1-2
About this Chapter
This chapter introduces the functions of the PC/HOST
File Transfer and Terminal Emulator Program (FTTERM).
It also lists the hardware and software that you need to
run FTTERM.
FTTERM is an IBM Personal Computerl (PC) licensed
program product that includes:
•
An IBM 3101 Display Terminal emulation program
that lets the PC communicate with a host computer
•
A file transfer program that lets the PC exchange files
with several types of host computers
•
A setup program for configuring FTTERM for different
hosts and online information services.
•
Several sample configuration files that let FTTERM
communicate with different hosts and online
information services.
"Terminology" on page 1-4 defines selected. terms that_
appear frequently in this manual. See the Glossary for a
complete list of terms.
In this manual, the terms personal computer and PC refer to several
models and configurations. See '·Required Hardware" on page 1-12
for a list of supported PC configurations.
1-3
Terminology
SNA Hosts and ASCII Hosts
SNA hosts are host computers that use the IBM SNA (System
Network Architecture) communication standard. FTIERM can
use either the protocol conversion method or the native
emulation method when transferring files with SNA hosts.
ASCII hosts are host computers that use the ASCII (American
Standard Code for Information Interchange) communication
standard. FTIERM can use only the native emulation method
when transferring files with ASCII hosts. Note: In this manual,
ASCII refers to asynchronous ASCII data and devices only.
Protocol Conversion Method and Native Emulation Method
It is not necessary to have a technical understanding of these
terms to use FTTERM. They simply provide a way to distinguish
FTTERM's two file transfer methods.
Briefly, the protocol conversion-method transfers a file in units
equivalent to a screen of data. It involves conversion between
the SOLC protocol of an SNA host and the start-stop protocol of a
PC. The protocol converter is an IBM 3708 or 3710 8-PA.
Protocol conversion is the preferred file transfer method for SNA
hosts that have the appropriate "host file transfer program listed
in "Required Software" on page 1-14.
The native emulation method transfers files line-by-line using the
start-stop protocol of the PC. This method must be used to
transfer files with all ASCII hosts, and with SNA hosts that do not
meet the requirements for protocol conversion.
1-~
Alphanumeric Files and Binary Files
Alphanumeric files consist of letters, numbers, and other data
that can be printed or displayed by the PC. Most data files at the
PC or host (including program source code) are alphanumeric.
Binary files consist of data that generally cannot be printed or
displayed. Most PC program files (including all COM and EXE
type files) are binary.
Emulating a 3101 Display
Terminal
A PC uses FTTERM to communicate with a host
computer. FTTERM lets the PC emulate (work like) a
3101 Display Terminal when communicating with SNA
hosts and ASCII hosts.
For FTTERM to communicate with SNA hosts, a 3708 or
3710.8-PA must be used between the PC and the host. The
PC can be attached to the 3708 or 3710 8-PA either
directly or through a modem.
FTTERM supports the following SNA host operating
systems:
•
•
•
•
VlVljCl\1S
l'vIVS/TSO
CICSjMVS or CICSjVSE
VSEjSP with Intelligent Workstation Support (I\VS).
FTTERM can communicate with ASCII hosts through a
direct connection or through a modem. It can also
communicate with ASCII hosts through a 3708 or 3710
8-PA.
1-5
See "Required Software" on page 1-14 for SNA and ASCII
host software requirements.
Regarding File Transfer
While using the PC as a 3101 Display Terminal, you can
transfer files between the PC and a host computer. The
files can be alphanumeric files, such as documents, or
binary files, such as compiled programs.
File Transfer Methods
FTTERM has two methods of transferring files: the
protocol conversion method and the native emulation
method. Most of the technical differences between the
methods do not concern the user. There are, however,
certain operational differences. For example, each method
has its own file transfer menu.
You specify the file transfer method in a configuration file.
(See "Configuration File Overview" on page C-4.)In general, the protocol conversion method is used with
SNA hosts and the native emulation method is used with
ASCII hosts. You may use the native emulation method
with SNA hosts as well, if the SNA host does not have the
host file transfer program listed under "Required
Software" on page 1-14, or if you just want basic 3101
emulation capabilities.
File Transfer Sources and
Destinations
FTTERM lets you transfer files between the sources and
destinations shown in Figure 1-1.
1-6
Source
Destination
PC DOS file
(alphanumeric)
ASCII or SNA host file
(alphanumeric)
PC printer
PC DOS file (binary)
SNA host file (binary)
ASCII host file (converted)
ASCII or SNA host file
(alphanumeric)
PC DOS file (alphanumeric)
PC printer
SNA host file (binary)
PC DOS file (binary)
PC printer
PC DOS screen
SNA host file
PC DOS file
PC printer
ASCII host screen
PC DOS file
PC printer
SNA host screen
SNA host file
PC DOS file
PC printer
Figure
1-1.
File Transfer Sources and Destinations
File Transfer Advantages
FTTERM's ability to transfer files between a PC and a
host computer provides these advantages:
•
Field personnel can exchange files with the home
office. For example, a sales representative can place
orders using an IB~I PC Convertible. The VM host at
the home office can send electronic mail back to the
PC.
•
If you run large programs or use large amounts of
data, you can store and process the data on a host
system, freeing the PC for other uses.
•
You can copy information from the PC display to a file
at the PC or the host. The information can be
produced by a PC program, a host program, or an
online information service such as the IBlVl
Information Network. You can store the displayed
1-7
data (a chart or table, for example) for editing or
inclusion in a document. You can also print the
displayed data at the PC printer.
Additional FTTERM Features
This section introduces some of the advanced features of
FTTERM.
Concurrent and Nonconcurrent
Mode
FTTERM normally runs in concurrent mode. In
concurrent mode, you can start a file transfer, switch to
the PC DOS session, and run PC programs during the file
transfer. You use special key sequences to switch
between the host, PC DOS, and file transfer functions.
If desired, you can switch from concurrent to
nonconcurrent mode. When FTTERM is in nonconcurrent
mode, you cannot run PC programs during the file
transfer. Nonconcurrent mode has the advantage of
performing faster file transfers.
See "Selecting Concurrent or Nonconcurrent Mode" on
page 3-17 for more information.
Transferring Individual Files or
Groups of Files
FTTERM provides two ways of specifying the source and
destination for a file transfer:
•
1-8
For individual files, online prompts help you to enter
the transfer command in the correct format. (You can
bypass these prompts when you become familiar with
the command formats.)
•
For groups of files, FTTERM can process a batch file
that contains up to 20 file transfer commands. This
lets you transfer a number of files with a single
command. It works for protocol conversion transfers
only.
You can create the batch file with any text editor. See
"Using a Batch File to Transfer Multiple Files" on
page 4-35 for more information.
Help. Windows
FTTERM and FTSETUP provide help windows when you
press Alt-FI. The help windows can help you use the file
transfer menus, enter file transfer commands, and work
with configuration files.
See "Displaying FTTERM's Help Windows" on page 3-20
for more information.
Configuration Files
FTTERM uses configuration files to define the details of
how the PC operates during hostsessions aiid- file
transfers. FTSETUP helps you to create and change
configuration files to match the requirements of different
hosts. For more information, see:
•
"Configuration File Overview" on page C-4
•
"Preparing and Selecting a Default Configuration
File" on page 2-17
•
Appendix C, "Creating and lVIodifying Configuration
Files."
1-9
Auto-Dial Capability
Modem users can add auto-dial definitions when they
create or modify a configuration file. An auto-dial
definition consists of the modem's dial command and a
telephone number.
The auto-dial definition lets you call a host by selecting it
from an online directory instead of entering the dialing
sequence manually. FTTERM displays the Auto-Dial
Directory when you begin the steps for establishing a host
seSSIon.
See "Defining Auto-Dial Sequences" on page C-24 for
more information.
Keyboard Definitions
One of the functions of a configuration file is setting up
the way the PC keyboard emulates the 3101 keyboard.
This is called the keyboard definition.
When you use FTSETUP to specify a keyboard definition,
you can configure the following- keyboard characteristics: •
Substitutes for 3101 keys that are not on the PC
keyboard, such as CLEAR
•
Substitutes for 3270 Display Terminal keys for use
during SNA host sessions, such as RESET and PAl
•
Keys that represent strings of text, such as a modem
command or a logon sequence.
See "Defining the Keyboard" on page C-30 for more
information.
1-10
Color, Highlighting, Status Line, and
MLU Support
If you are using a color display, FTTERM lets you select
from eight predefined color combinations by pressing
Alt-F5. The colors are used on the FTTERM menus,
FTSETUP screens, and help windows only.
In addition, the 3708 offers terminal selections that
support the following FTTERM capabilities during ·an
SNA host session:
•
The use of color on color monitors or highlighting on
monochrome monitors
•
The positioning of a status line on the PC display's
25th line
•
Support for addressing the PC display and printer as
separate multiple logical units (MLUs). This allows
the PC printer to be used as a host system printer
while a host session is in progress .
. See Appendix E,. "IBM 3708 and 3710 8-PA
Considerations," for information about these-terminal . selections. The information is intended for system
administrators who want to customize the terminal
definitions for the 3708 or create similar terminal
definitions for a 3710 8-PA.
National Language Character Set
Support
For those who are using national language keyboards,
FTTERM includes translation tables to ensure that
displayable characters remain consistent when
alphanumeric files are converted between ASCII and
EBCDIC formats. FTTERM supports the following
national language keyboards:
•
•
Canadian French
French
1-11
•
•
•
•
•
German
Italian
Spanish
UK English
US English.
See Appendix G, "National Language Considerations,"
for more information.
ROLM CBX II Support
FTTERM lets you connect the PC to an ASCII host, 3708,
or 3710 8-PA by way of a ROLM CBX II (computerized
branch exchange). See Appendix H, "Using FTTERM
with ROLM Data Communications Equipment," for
instructions on using the PC devices that support the
ROLM CBX II.
What You Need To Use FTTERM
To install and run FTTERM, you need the following
hardware and software~
Required Hardware
•
One of the following models of the IBM PC:
-
1-12
Personal Computer
Personal Computer -:- Extended (PC XT)
Personal Computer - Advanced Technology (PC
AT)
3270 PC not using the Control Program
3270 PC AT not using the Control Program
Portable PC
PC Convertible.
•
A minimum of 256K bytes of random access memory
(RAM).
•
Two spare diskettes for creating an FTTERM working
diskette and a FILECONV working diskette (not
required for PCs with a fixed disk).
•
An IBM Monochrome Adapter, Color/Graphics
Adapter, or Enhanced Graphics Adapter connected to
a video monitor capable of displaying 80 columns.
•
One of the following asynchronous adapters (not
required if you are using a ROLM data communication
device or an internal modem):
IBM PC Asynchronous Communications Adapter
(for an IBM PC, PC XT, or Portable PC)
IBM PC AT Serial/Parallel Adapter
IBM PC Convertible Serial/Parallel Adapter.
•
ROLM CBX II users. One of the following:
ROLMphone with the Data Communication Module
(DCM)
ROLM Juniper II feature
ROLM Data Terminal Interface (DTI)
ROLM Integrated Personal Computer Interface
(IPCI) card or IPCI AT card, as appropriate.
•
One of the following modems (not required if the PC is
connected directly to a 3708, 3710 8-PA, or ASCII host):
Bell 203 compatible 300 baud modem
Bell 212-A compatible 1200 baud modem such as the
IBM 5841 1200bps Modem
CCITT Recommendation V.22bis compatible 2400
baud modem.
The modem cable must conform to the EIA 232-C
standard. Consult the modem dealer or the system
administrator for the correct cable.
1-13
•
A 3708 or 3710 8-PA and the cable that connects it to a
modem or Asynchronous Communications Adapter (not
required for communicating with ASCII hosts).
Required Software
•
The IBM PC Disk Operating System (DOS), Version 2.0
or later.
•
To transfer files with an SNA host through a 3708 or
3710 8-PA using protocol conversion, one of the
following versions of the 3270 PC File Transfer
Program is required at the SNA host:
IND$FILE for VM/CMS (Program Number
5664-281)
IND$FILE for MVS/TSO (Program Number
5665-311)
IND$FILE for CICS/MVS or CICS/VSE (Program
Number 5798-DQH).
For hosts running VSE/SP, Release 2.1 and later, no
additional software is required. -FTTERM
- communicates with the standard Intelligent
Workstation Support (IWS) program.
•
For transmitting files to an ASCII or SNA host using
native emulation, the host must have a line-oriented
data entry program, such as a text editor.
The host system administrator can verify whether the host
requirements are met.
1-14
Chapter 2. Preparing to Use
FTTERM
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a Working Copy of FTTERM .........
Procedure for One-Drive PCs .............
Procedure for Two-Drive Systems ..........
Procedure for Fixed Disk Systems ........
Selecting a Character Translation Table ......
Preparing and Selecting a Default Configuration
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-8
2-12
2-15
2-17
2-1
Notes:
2-2
About this Chapter
This chapter describes:
•
Taking inventory to make sure you have received the
correct items in the FTTERM package.
•
Making a working copy of the FTTERM program
diskette. Users of fixed disk systems will copy the
FTTERM files to the fixed disk.
•
Selecting a character translation table. A character
translation table ensures the correct handling of
certain characters during file transfers.
•
Requirements for preparing and selecting a default
configuration file. This section describes the general
procedure and refers you to detailed procedures
elsewhere in this manual.
Taking Inventory.
The following list describes the items you should have
received in the FTTERM package. If any item is missing,
contact your place of purchase.
•
One copy of this manuaL
•
An FTTERM registration card located in Appendix I.
Complete the registration card and return it to IBM.
Doing so lets IBM notify you of updates to FTTERM.
•
One 5-1/4 inch diskette labelled "PC/HOST File
Transfer and Terminal Emulator Program." This is
the program diskette for all PCs except the PC
Convertible.
.
2-3
•
One 3-1/2 inch diskette labelled "PC/HOST File
Transfer and Terminal Emulator Program." This is
the program diskette for the PC Convertible.
This manual refers to either of these diskettes as the
FTTERM program diskette.
Making a Working Copy of
FTTERM
This section includes three procedures, separated
according to the model of PC:
•
•
•
One-drive PCs
Two-drive PCs
Fixed-disk PCs.
Procedure for One-Drive pes
Follow these steps if the PC has a single diskette drive
and no fixed disk. You will need the following diskettes:
•
The FTTERM program diskette
•
Two spare diskettes, which are referred to as the
FTTERM working diskette and the FILECONV
working diskette.
1. Label one spare diskette "FTTERM Working Diskette"
or equivalent.
2. Turn on the PC and load DOS in the normal way. (If
you need help with this step, refer to the IBM PC
Guide to Operations.) The DOS system prompt appears
on the display:
A>
2-4
3. Prepare to format the FTTERM working diskette by
entering:
FORMAT IS
The /S option copies files to the working diskette that
will enable you to load DOS from it. (If you need help
with this step, refer to the FORMAT command in the
IBM PC Guide to Operations.)
4.
In response to the message that appears, remove the
DOS diskette and insert the FTTERM working
diskette. Press Enter to proceed.
5. After the FTTERM working diskette has been
formatted, enter an N to return to DOS.
6. Change the current drive from drive A to drive B by
entering:
B:
You will see:
A>B:
Insert diskette for drive B: and- - - -- --strike any key when ready
7. The correct diskette (the FTTERM working diskette) is
already in position. Press any key to proceed.
8. Prepare to copy the FTTERM files from the program
diskette to the working diskette by entering:
A:COPYFILS
You will see:
B)A:COPYFILS
Insert diskette for drive A: and
s~rike any key when ready
2-5
As the FTTERM files are copied to the FTTERM
working diskette, you will be prompted to exchange
diskettes several times. Remember:
•
The diskette for drive A: is the FTTERM program
diskette.
•
The diskette for drive B: is the FTTERM working
diskette.
When the copying is finished, B> appears.
9. Enter DIR to verify that the FTTERM working
diskette contains the following files:
COMMAND.COM
FTTERM.EXE
FTSETUP.EXE
FTTERM.HLP
FTSETUP.HLP
IBM3708.SET
DOWJONES.SET
SOURCE.SET
SEND.COM
RECEIVE.COM
DEFAULT.TBL
DEFAULT.SET
Note:
vary.
The order of the files can
See "FTTERM Files" on page 2-14 for a description of
each file.
10. Change the current drive from drive B to drive A by
entering:
A:
2-6
You will see:
B>A:
Insert diskette for drive A: and
strike any key when ready
11. Remove the FTTERM working diskette and insert the
DOS diskette.
12. Label the remaining spare diskette "FILECONV
Working Diskette" or equivalent.
13. Prepare to format the FILECONV working diskette by
entering:
FORlVIAT
14. In response to the message that appears, remove the
DOS diskette and insert the FTTERM working
diskette. Press Enter to proceed.
15. After the FILECONV working diskette has been
formatted, enter an N to return to DOS.
16. Remove the FILECONV working diskette and insert
the FTTERM program diskette.
17. Copy the FILECONV program from the program
diskette to the FILECONV working diskette by
entering:
COpy FILECONV.EXE B:
You will see:
A>COPY FILECONV.EXE B:
Insert diskette for drive B: and
strike any key when ready
Remove the FTTERM program diskette and insert the
FILECONV working diskette. Press any key to
proceed. When the file has been copied, you will see:
1 File(s) copied.
2-7
18. Do one of the following:
•
If you are using a standard (United States English)
keyboard, you can now store the FTTERM program
diskette in a safe place and proceed to "Preparing
and Selecting a Default Configuration File" on
page 2-17.
•
If you are using a national language keyboard,
proceed to "Selecting a Character Translation
Table" on page 2-15.
Note: If you have received a
preconfigured version of FTTERM
you may not have to select a
character translation table (national
language keyboard users only) or a
default configuration file. Ask the
person who provided the FTTERM
program diskette whether you must
do these procedures.
Procedure for Two-Drive Systems
Follow these steps if the PC ha's tw·odiskette drives and no fixed disk. You will need the following diskettes:
•
The FTTERM program diskette
•
Two spare diskettes, which are referred to as the
FTTERM working diskette and the FILECONV
working diskette.
1. Label one spare diskette "FTTERM Working Diskette"
or equivalent and insert it in drive B.
2. Turn on the PC and load DOS in the normal way. (If
you need help with this step, refer to the IBM PC
Guide to Operations.) The DOS system prompt appears
on the display:
A>
2-8
3. Prepare to format the FTTERM working diskette by
entering
FORMAT B:/S
The /S option copies files to the working diskette that
will enable you to load DOS from it. (If you need help
with this step, refer to the FORMAT command in the
IBM PC Guide to Operations.)
4.
In response to the message that appears, press Enter to
proceed.
5. After the FTTERM working diskette has been
formatted, enter an N to return to DOS.
6. Remove the DOS diskette from drive A and insert the
FTTERM program diskette.
7. Change the current drive from drive A to drive B by
entering:
B:
You will see:
A>B:
B>
8. Copy the FTTERM files from the program diskette to
the working diskette by entering:
A:COPYFILS
When the copying is finished, B> appears.
2-9
9. Enter DIR to verify that the FTTERM working
diskette contains the following files:
COMMAND. COM
FTTERM.EXE
FTSETUP.EXE
FTTERM.HLP
FTSETUP.HLP
IBM3708.SET
DOWJONES.SET
SOURCE.SET
SEND.COM
RECEIVE.COM
DEFAULT.TBL
DEFAULT.SET
Note:
The order of the files can
vary.
See "FTTERM Files" on page 2-14 for a description of
each file.
10. Change the current drive from drive B to drive A by·
entering:
A:
You will see:
B>A:
A>
11. Remove the FTTERM program diskette from drive A
and insert the DOS diskette.
12. Remove the FTTERM working diskette from drive B.
13. Label the remaining spare diskette "FILECONV
Working Diskette" or equivalent and insert it into
drive B.
2-10
14. Format the FILECONV working diskette by entering:
FORMAT B:
15. In response to the message, press any key to proceed.
16. After the FILECONV working diskette has been
formatted, enter an N to return to DOS.
17. Remove the DOS diskette from drive A and insert the
FTTERM program diskette.
18. Copy the FILECONV program from the program
diskette to the FILECONV working diskette by
entering:
COpy FILECONV.EXE B:
You will see:
1 File(s) copied.
19. Do one of the following:
•
If you are using a standard (United States English)
keyboard, you can now store the FTTERM program
diskette in a safe place and proceed to "Preparing
and Selecting a Default Configuration File" on
page 2-17.
•
If you are using a national language keyboard,
proceed to "Selecting" a Character Translation
Table" on page 2-15.
Note: If you have received a
preconfigured version of FTTERM,
you may not have to select a
character translation table (national
language keyboard users only) or a
default configuration file. Ask the
person who provided the FTTERM
program diskette whether you must
do these procedures.
2-11
Procedure for Fixed Disk Systems
Follow thes.e steps if the PC has a fixed disk. You will
need the following:
•
The FTTERM program diskette
•
Approximately 300K bytes of space on the fixed disk.
Note: The COpy command in this
procedure copies the FTTERM files into
the root directory of the fixed disk (C:\).
You can substitute a path to an existing
subdirectory, if preferred.
1. Turn on the PC and load DOS in the normal way. (If
you need help with this step, refer to the IBM PC
Guide to Operations.) The DOS system prompt appears
on the display:
c>
2. Insert the FTTERM program diskette into drive A.
3.. Copy the FTTERM files from the program diskette to
the fixed disk by entering:
A:COPYFILS
When the copying is finished, C > appears.
4. Copy the FILECONV program from the program
diskette to the fixed disk by entering:
COpy A:FILECONV.EXE
5. Enter DIR IvV to verify that the fixed disk includes
the following files:
COMMAND. COM
FTTERM.EXE
FTSETUP.EXE
FTTERM.HLP
FTSETUP.HLP
2-12
IBM3708.SET
DOWJONES.SET
SOURCE.SET
SEND.COM
RECEIVE.COM
DEFAULT.TBL
DEFAULT.SET
FILECONV.EXE
Note:
vary.
The order of the files can
See "FTTERM Files" on page 2-14 for a description of
each file.
6. Do one of the following:
•
If you are using a standard (United States English)
keyboard, you can now store the FTTERM program
diskette in a safe place and proceed to "Preparing
and Selecting a Default Configuration File" on
page 2-17.
•
If you are using a national language keyboard,
proceed to "Selecting a Character Translation
Table" on page 2-15 ..
Note: If you have received a
preconfigured version of FTTERM,
you may not have to select a
character translation table (national
language keyboard users only) or a
default configuration file. Ask the
person who provided the FTTERM
program diskette whether you must
do these procedures.
2-13
FTTERM Files
FTTERM.EXE
The main FTIERM program file. You must be
logged on to the PC disk and directory that
contains this file when you run FTTERM.
FTTERM.HLP
FTSETUP.HLP
The FTTERM and FTSETUP help message files.
Do not edit or erase these files.
FTSETUP.EXE
The program file that creates and changes
configuration files, and that selects one file
as the default configuration.
Sample configuration files:
IBM3708.SET
DOWJONES.SET
SOURCE.SET
(IBM 3708 using protocol conversion)
(Dow Jones News Service)
(The Source)
DEFAULT.SET
The file that contains the default
configuration. It is created by the FTSETUP
program when you select a default configuration
file. You do not change this file directly.
SEND.COM
RECEIVE.COM
FILECONV.EXE
' Program files that let you (or a PC program)
enter a file transfer command in the PC
DOS session.
The program file that converts files between
binary and alphanumeric formats for transfer
using the native emulation method.
Character translation tables
for national language keyboards
(present on program disk only):
CFTRAN.TBL
FRTRAN.TBL
GRTRAN.TBL
ITTRAN.TBL
SPTRAN.TBL
UKTRAN.TBL
USTRAN.TBL
2-14
(Canadian French)
(French)
(German)
(Italian)
(Spanish)
(United Kingdom)
(United States)
DEFAUlT.TBl
The default character translation table. It
initially contains US English characters. You
can copy a character translation table for a
national language into DEFAUlT.TBl as part
of making the FTTERM working diskette.
COPYFllS.BAT
The batch file for creating an FTTERM working
diskette.
Selecting a Character Translation
Table
Note: This section is only for users
who have national language keyboards.
If you have a national language
keyboard, but you are using a
preconfigured version of FTTERM, you
may be able to skip this section. Ask
the person who provided the FTTERM
program diskette whether you must
select a character translation table.
FTTERM's character translation tables are contained on
the FTTERM program diskette. The relevant files are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CFTRAN.TBL
FRTRAN.TBL
GRTRAN.TBL
ITTRAN.TBL
SPTRAN.TBL
UKTRAN.TBL
USTRAN.TBL
(Canadian French)
(French)
(German)
(Italian)
(Spanish)
(United Kingdom English)
(United States English).
2-15
The character translation tables support the special
characters associated with the languages shown. They
ensure that when a file is sent to the host, it contains the
same special characters as the PC file.
Appendix G, "National Language Considerations,"
explains how the character translation tables work. It
also lists the contents of the character translation tables
used by the host. Those tables are listed for advanced
users who want to modify the FTTERM translation tables.
Follow these steps to select a character translation table:
1. Diskette systems:
a. Verify that the DOS prompt (A> ) is displayed.
b. Insert the FTTERM program diskette in drive A.
c. Insert the FTTERM working diskette in drive B
(users of one-drive PCs will do this step later when
instructed to do so online).
Fixed disk systems:
a. Verify that the DOS prompt (C > ) is displayed.
b. Insert the FTTERM program diskette in drive A.
2. Select the appropriate character translation table and
copy that file from the program diskette to the
working disk by entering:
COpy A:xxTRAN.TBL DEFAULT.TBL
where xx represents the first two letters of the
appropriate character translation table file. The copy
you make on the working disk has the name
DEFAULT.TBL.
2-16
For example, if you are using a French character
keyboard, your command would be:
COpy A:FRTRAN.TBL DEFAULT.TBL
3. Store the FTTERM program diskette in a safe place.
4. Proceed to "Preparing and Selecting a Default
Configuration File."
Preparing and Selecting a Default
Configuration File
Note: If you are using a preconfigured
version of FTTERM, you may be able to
skip this section. Ask the person who
provided the FTTERM program diskette
whether you must select a default
configuration file.
FTTERM uses configuration files to. determin~how it_
works with different hosts. See "Configuration File
Overview" on page C-4 for an introduction to
configuration files.
FTTERM needs information from a configuration file to
start successfully. Since many configuration files may be
on the FTTERM working disk, you must select one as the
startup or default configuration file.
Before you can select a default configuration file, you
must make these preparations:
1. Identify the host you will use most often. It is
recommended that the default configuration file be set
up for the prinlary host; however, it can actually be set
up for any host.
:2-17
2. Gather the information needed to create a
configuration file for the host or to modify one of the
sample configuration files that came with FTTERM.
See "Using the Configuration Worksheet" on
page C-13 for a list of the information needed to create
or modify a configuration file.
See Appendix D, "Sample Configuration Files" for a
list of the information contained in the sample
configuration files.
3. Create or modify the configuration file.
See "Creating a Configuration File" on page C-8, or
"Modifying an Existing Configuration File" on
page C-12, for detailed procedures.
4. Select the new configuration file as the default
configuration file.
See "Selecting a Default Configuration File" on
page C-41 for the detailed procedure.
2-18
Chapter 3. Using FTTERM
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting FTTERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting a Host Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Instructions for Modem Users ......
Special Instructions for 3708 and 3710 8-PA
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After Starting a Host Session ............
Switching Between FTTERM Functions ......
The PC DOS Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Host Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Transfer Main Menus ..............
The Host Messages Screen ..............
Selecting Concurrent or Nonconcurrent Mode ..
Loading a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Current Configuration File ..
Disconnecting from the Host ...............
Displaying FTTERM's Help Windows ........
Editing FTTERM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an AUTOEXEC.BAT File ............
Entering Commands from the DOS Prompt ..
Exiting from FTTERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using FTTERM in Nonresident Mode ........
Using FTTERM with Other Resident Programs .
FTTERM Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3-3
3-6
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-22
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-26
3-26
3-1
Notes:
(
3-2
About this Chapter
This chapter describes the following procedures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Starting FTTERM
Starting a host session
Switching between FTTERM functions (the host
session, PC DOS session, file transfer functions, and
host messages screen)
Selecting concurrent or nonconcurrent mode
Loading a configuration file
Disconnecting from the host
Displaying FTTERM's help windows
Editing FTTERM commands
Exiting from FTTERM
Starting FTTERM from an AUTOEXEC.BAT file
Using FTTERM in nonresident mode
Using FTTERM with other resident programs
Using FTTERM reserved words correctly.
This chapter also introduces the FTTERM file transfer
menus. For step-by-step file transfer procedures, see
Chapter 4, "Transferring Files Using the Protocol
Conversion Method," and Chapter 5, "Transferring Files
Using the Native Emulation Method."
Starting FTTERM
Follow these steps to start FTTERM:
1. Load DOS in the normal way. (You can load DOS
from the FTTERM working diskette, if you like.) One
of the following prompts appears on the display:
Dishette users:
Fixed dish users:
.A. >
C>
3-3
Note: If the DOS system disk
includes an AUTOEXEC.BAT file
that automatically runs an
. applieation program after DOS is
loaded, exit from that program to the
DOS system prompt before
proceeding. See also "Using an
AUTOEXEC.BAT File" on
page 3-23.
2. Diskette users: If you did not load DOS from the
FTTERM working diskette, insert the FTTERM
working diskette into drive A.
Fixed disk users: If you copied the FTTERM files into
a fixed disk subdirectory, use the CD command to
change to that subdirectory.
3. Enter:
FTTERM
FTTERM displays a trademark and copyright screen.
4. . Press any key to proceed.FTTERM displays- one. of
these menus:
•
The File Transfer Main Menu (for the protocol
conversion method) (Figure 3-1 on page 3-5)
•
The File Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation
(Figure 3-2 on page 3-6).
FTTERM decides which menu to display based on the
default configuration file you selected, as described in
"Preparing and Selecting a Default Configuration
File" on page 2-17.
3-4
FILE TRANSFER MAIN MENU
MODE: CONCURRENT
10
Command
Description
1
SEND
RECEIVE
BATCH
LOAD
MODE
Send data from PC
Receive data to PC
Send/Receive multiple files
Load a configuration file
Toggle nonconcurrent and concurrent
2
3
4
5
Type an 10 number or Command and press ENTER.
===>
Alt-F1 = HELP Alt-F2 = RETURN
Alt-F4 = RETRIEVE Alt-F5 = COLOR
Alt-F6 = DISC Alt-F7 = MSGS Alt-Fa = FTTERM Alt-F9 = PC DOS
Alt-F10 = HOST
Figure
3-1.
The File Transfer Main Menu (for Protocol
Conversion). Appendix B, "FTTERM Menus," defines
each item on the File Transfer Main Menu.
Chapter 4, "Transferring Files Using the Protocol
Conversion Method," describes using the menu to
perform file transfers.
3-5
FILE TRANSFER MAIN MENU- NATIVE EMULATION
MODE: CONCURRENT
(
ill
Command
Description
1
2
3
TRANSMIT
SAVE
COpy
LOAD
MODE
Send data from PC
Receive data to PC
Copy host screen to file or printer
Load a configuration file
Toggle nonconcurrent and concurrent
4
5
Type an 10 number or Command and press ENTER.
===>
Alt-F1 = HELP Alt-F2 = RETURN
Alt-F4 = RETRIEVE Alt-FS = COLOR
Alt-F6 = DISC
Alt-FS = FTTERM Alt-FS = PC DOS
Alt-F10 = HOST
Figure
3-2.
The File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation. Appendix B, "FTTERM Menus," defines
each item on the File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation. Chapter 5, "Transferring Files Using the
Native Emulation Method," describes using the menu to
perform file transfers.
Starting a Host Session
To start a host session from the File Transfer Main l\1enu
or File Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation, follow
these steps:
1. FTTERM will attempt to establish a host connection
based on the information in the default configuration
file. If the default configuration is not appropriate for
the host you want to contact, select item 4 (Load a
configuration file) and specify the file to be used. If
necessary, see "Loading a Configuration File" on
page 3-18 for more information.
3-6
\
2. Press the key sequence for switching to the host
session (default is Alt-F10). The key sequence is
displayed next to HOST at the bottom of the menu.
When you switch to the host session, one of the following
occurs:
•
A blank screen appears. Press the Enter key several
times and a message from the 3708, 3710 8-PA, or host
will appear.
•
A host logon message or system banner appears.
Follow the normal procedure for logging on to the
host. Proceed to "Switching Between FTTERM
Functions" on page 3-11.
•
The Auto-Dial Directory appears. See "Special
Instructions for Modem Users" on page 3-8.
•
The following message appears:
***
Establish connection if necessary
***
If you are using a modem, see "Special Instructions for
Modem Users" on page 3-8. If you are not using a
modem, the message means that FTTERM is not able
to activate the communications link. Possible causes
include:
A loose, defective, or incorrectly wired cable
A defective or incorrectly installed Asynchronous
Communications Adapter
A problem with the ASCII host, 3708, or 3710 8-P A.
If the problem continues, seek qualified technical
assistance.
•
A message from a 3708 or 3710 8-PA appears. See
"Special Instructions for 3708 and 3710 8-PA Users" on
page 3-9.
3-7
Special Instructions for Modem
Users
If the PC is communicating through a modem, make the
following preparations. Refer to the modem's
documentation if necessary.
•
The modem must not have both Data Set Ready (DSR)
and Receive Line Signal Detector (RLSD) (carrier
detect) strapped high.
•
If the modem has an originate/answer switch, set it to
ORIGINATE.
•
When using the protocol conversion method of
communicating with SNA hosts: If the modem has a
full duplex/half duplex switch, set it to FULL
DUPLEX.
Recommended switch settings for two widely-used modems
are:
IBM 5841
HAYE81200
81
82
83
84
85
86
ON
UP
ON
UP
ON
DN
ON. ON .ON
UP DN UP
87
88
ON .OFF
UP DN
When you switch to the host session (default is Alt-FIO),
FTTERM displays the following message if you have not
added any auto-dial definitions in the configuration file:
***
Establish connection if necessary
***
Type the modem's dial command and the host's telephone
number as described in the modem's documentation, and
press the Enter key. If you have added at least one
auto-dial definition in the configuration file, FTTERM
displays the Auto-Dial Directory, which is a list of
identifiers for the auto-dial definitions. You can make a
selection from the directory or type a modem command
directly by first pressing the Enter key,
3-8
AUTO-DIAL DIRECTORY
10 Name
1
2
3
4
5
VM host
IBM Information Network
The Source
Dow Jones
Compuserve
Type an 10 number and press ENTER or
press ENTER to enter modem command
===>
ALT-F8 = FTTERM ALT-F9 = PCDOS
When you have selected a host from the Auto-Dial
Directory or entered a modem command directly, the
modem makes the call. If the call goes through, you will
see either:
•
A blank screen. Press the Enter key several times.
•
A host system banner or logon message. Follow the
normal procedure for logging on to the host.
Special Instructions for 3708 and 3710
8-PA Users
You may be required to log on to the 3708 or 3710 8-PA
before you can log on to the host. The steps for logging
on to the 3708 or 3710 8-PA depend on the way the system
administrator has set it up. The procedure could include
any combination of these steps:
1. Entering a port password.
2. Selecting a terminal type from a list.
3. Selecting a host system.
3-9
It is also possible that the 3708 or 3710 8-PA will not
require any logon steps. Consult the system administrator
for the corn~ct procedure.
When you have made all the required entries for logging
on to the 3708 or 3710 8-P A, you will see either:
•
A blank screen. Press the Enter key several times.
•
A host system banner or logon message. Follow the
normal procedure for logging on to the host.
After Starting a Host Session
When you have established the host session, you can do
any of the following:
•
Run host programs.
•
Return to the file transfer menu (default is AH-F8) for
transferring files.
See Chapter 4, "Transferring Files Using the Protocol
Conversion Method," and Chapter 5, _"Tr~n~fe:rrinK
Files Using the Native Emulation Method," for
step-by-step instructions on performing file transfers.
•
Switch to the PC DOS session (default is Alt-F9) for
running PC programs.
See "Switching Between FTTERM Functions" on
page 3-11 for more information on switching between
FTTERM functions.
•
Disconnect from the host (Alt-F6).
See "Disconnecting from the Host" on page 3-20 for
more information.
3-10
Switching Between FTTERM
Functions
You can select any of four functions when using
FTTERM:
•
•
•
•
PC DOS session
Host session
File Transfer Main Menu
Host messages screen.
You use special key sequences to switch between the
FTTERM functions. The key sequences appear at the
bottom of the File Transfer Main Menu, using these
abbreviations:
PC DOS
Switches to the PC DOS session. The default
sequence is Alt-F9. (When you run FTTERM
in nonresident mode, this sequence appears
as EXIT.)
HOST
Switches to the host session. The default
sequence is Alt-FIO ..
FTTERM
Switches to the File Transfer Main Menu.
The default sequence is Alt-F8.
The FTTERM key sequence does not perform
any function, but appears on the File
Transfer Main Me'nu as a reminder. If you
press it at the menu, the only effect is a
beep.
3-11
LSGS
Switches to the host messag~;::,
default sequence is Alt-F7.
",",.L,",~A~.
_
Note: .The key sequences appear on
the File Transfer Main Menu only.
Therefore, it is recommended that you
make a note of the key sequences. This
helps you remember how to switch out
of functions that do not display the key
sequences.
The key sequences are defined in the configuration file
you are using. If you change the key sequences with
FTSETUP, and/or load a new configuration file where the
keys have been redefined, FTTERM displays the new
sequences. See "Extended Code for Switch to xxxx?" on
page C-22 for more information.
Figure 3-3 shows the relationships between the FTTERM
functions, including the key sequences for switching from
one function to a different function.
3-12
File Transfer Menu
Host Session
vv
vv
vv
vv
vv
vv
33JJ:\J1JJ3
"'"
"""
"'""
""""
VV"""" """"
711171777177,.",,"" 00000000
71777177177""
0000000000
3J3lJJJ3JJJJ
7j~
~~~~
gg
771'\"
77 ""
00 .... '"
00""
00
00
77 ""
11 /'Itt
77
0011/1
00,","
00
00
00
00
~~3J33JJJJ;~
~~
°gOOOOOOOO~O
333JJJJ331
77
OIJvOOOOU
y~~~
33
7~~Y
33
3JJJvV
yy
VV
3333 VVYV
33 VV
33
SEND
RECEIVE
BATCH
LOAD
S.nd data frOM PC
ReeelY. data to PC
Send/R.c.,..,.
MY
1t 1 ple f I 1 ••
Load • con' 1 Qur.t lon , lie
Toggle nonconcur,..nt and concur_nt
Type an ID nu""be ... or Co.... nd and pr ••• ENTER.
Alt-F10
Alt-Fa
D
1~1I11I11I1I111E8=:J E8=~
Alt-F9
Alt-F7
FILE TRANSFER COMPLETE
I'tONTHLV fluOGET
FILE TRANSFER COMPLETE
eMS OISK IS REAO-ONLV
1= I LE TRANSFER CANCELED
l,see."
AUGUST
BUDGETED
FaA ",ONTH
56'5.00
2'50."
10.""
50.00
1'5.00
&5.00
ACTUAL
:
40&5."
250.08
65.90
37.'518
19.80
58.6'5
"
SEPTEMBER
BuDGET
ACTUAL
82.3(1 I
100.0'11 I
'565.00
Z'50.00
'}4t.l"
75.00 I
126.67
90.23
PC DOS Session
Figure
3-3.
~!:~:
52.87
Host Messages Screen
FTTERM Functions and Default Key Sequences
3-13
The PC DOS Session
The PC DOS session lets you perform normal PC
operations .. For example, you can:
•
•
Enter DOS commands like DIR and COpy
Run application programs like word processors and
spreadsheets.
You can switch to the PC DOS session while a host
session is in progress.
In concurrent mode, you can switch to the PC DOS
session after starting a file transfer (exceptions are
transfers from the PC screen to a file or printer). The file
transfer continues while you run programs in the PC DOS
seSSIon.
Note these restrictions on switching into and out of the
PC DOS session:
•
In nonconcurrent mode, you cannot switch to the PC
DOS session during any file transfers. See "Selecting
Concurrent or Nonconcurrent Mode" on page 3-17 for
more information.
•
FTTERM does not let you switch out of the PC DOS
session if the PC program is using the display in
graphics mode. This would be the case for PCs using
the Color/Graphics Adapter only. You must exit from
the program (or exit from the graphics functions of the
program) before you can switch out of the PC DOS
seSSIon.
•
FTTERM does not let you switch out of the PC DOS
session when you are creating a file with the
COpy CON filename command. Exit from the
command with Ctrl-Z or Ctrl-C before switching to
another function.
•
Switching out of the PC DOS session may be delayed if
you are displaying text with the TYPE filename
command or COpy filename CON command.
3-14
The Host Session
In the host session, you can run any program or
transaction that you can run from a terminal connected
directly to the host. For example, you can edit a CMS
file, compile a program under TSO, or run a CICS
transaction. However, you cannot be running a host
program while transferring files using the protocol
conversion method.
Note: You cannot switch to the host
session during file transfers using the
protocol conversion method, because the
host session is being used by the
transfer program.
File Transfer Main Menus
FTTERM has two file transfer menus with the following
titles:
•
File Transfer Main Menu. This menu offers transfers
using protocol conversion. See Figure 3-1 on page 3-5.
•
File Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation. This
menu offers transfers using native emulation. See
Figure 3-2 on page 3-6.
The menu that FTTERM displays depends on the
configuration file you are using.
Note: This manual refers to both of
these menus as "'the file transfer menu"
except when it is important to specify a
particular menu.
3-15
The file transfer menu is the first screen you see when
you run FTTERM. It contains selections for transferring
files, loading a new configuration file, and changing
between concurrent and nonconcurrent mode. It also
identifies the key sequences that you use for switching
between functions, accessing the help windows, retrieving
a previous command, changing the screen colors, and
disconnecting from a host.
The file transfer menu uses windows to help you enter a
file transfer command and to report the progress of a
transfer.
The Host Messages Screen
The Host Messages screen shows the most recent 24 lines
of messages that are received from the host during a file
transfer using a batch transfer request file.
The messages on the Host Messages screen can be from
the host system operator, such as '"System coming down at
12:00." They can also describe the status of transfers when
you are using a batch transfer request file. See "Using a
Batch File to Transfer Multiple Files" on page 4-35 for
instructions on using batch transfer request "file"s:-See
Appendix A, "File Transfer Messages," for a list of the
messages.
When you enter file transfer commands individually, the
status messages appear in a window on the file transfer
menu.
Note: Although FTTERM routes
messages that are received during a file
transfer to the Host Messages screen or
the file transfer menu, certain
unexpected system operator messages
can disrupt the file transfer. Therefore,
you should use the command that
prevents host messages from being sent
to the terminal. Consult the host
system administrator.
3-16
If a host message disrupts a file transfer, follow these
steps:
1. Press the key sequence for the host session (default
is Alt-FIO).
2. Press the PF2 key sequence (default is Alt-F2)
several times to terminate the host file transfer
program and return the host to the command ready
state.
3. Press the FTTERM key sequence (default is
Alt-FS).
4. Start the file transfer again.
Selecting Concurrent or
Nonconcurrent Mode
FTTERM normally runs in concurrent mode. In
concurrent mode, you can start a file transfer~ sWItch to
the PC DOS session, and run a PC program during the
transfer. 1 However, if you switch to a host session or the
file transfer menu, FTTERM suspends the processing of
the PC program until you return to the PC DOS session.
Technical note: FTTERM operates concurrently with any PC
program that conforms to the following design standards:
•
•
•
•
•
•
It uses standard PC DOS interfaces.
It passes on interrupts that it intercepts.
It does not trap the session switching keystrokes. (These can
be redefined in the configuration file.)
It does not write directly to the video buffer from an I/O
interrupt.
It does not disable interrupts longer than it takes to receive a
character.
It does not cause a one-character time delay in servicing
communication interrupts.
r-/J'
3-17
Note: When you are in the PC DOS
session, do not edit or erase a PC file
currently being transferred.
You lose some performance in the file transfer and the PC
program when you run both of them concurrently. If
performance becomes a problem, you can switch to
nonconcurrent mode. In nonconcurrent mode, you cannot
switch to the PC DOS session during a file transfer.
Nonconcurrent mode provides faster file transfers. It is
useful when you want to transfer large amounts of data
and concurrent PC operation is not required.
To switch between concurrent and nonconcurrent modes
enter a 5 on the file transfer menu. You can also enter
MODE orM.
The file transfer menu shows CONCURRENT or
NONCONCURRENT in the upper left corner to indicate
which mode FTTERM is using.
Loading a Configuration File
Loading a configuration file causes it to take effect as a
temporary alternative to the default configuration file. 2
This is useful, for example, when the default configuration
is not correct for a host or 3708/3710 8-PA port that you
contact only occasionally.
The configuration file takes effect as soon as it is loaded.
It stays in effect until you load another configuration file,
or until you reset or turn off the PC.
See "Configuration File Overview" on page C-4 for a brief
introduction to configuration files.
3-18
To load a configuration file, do either of the following:
•
At the file transfer menu, enter a 4 for the LOAD
command. FTTERM displays the correct format for
entering the configuration filename. Enter the name
of the desired configuration file.
•
Enter LOAD and the configuration filename as a
single step, instead of making a selection from the
menu. For example:
= = = > LOAD TSO.SET
It is not necessary to reset or turn off the PC to return to
the default configuration. You can use the preceding
procedure to reload the default configuration file
DEFAULT.SET.
See Appendix C, "Creating and Modifying Configuration
Files," for instructions on using FTSETUP to create and
modify configuration files.
Displaying the Current Configuration
File
You can display the configuration file that is currently in
effect by using a question mark (?) instead of a filename
with the LOAD command:
=
= = > LOAD ?
FTTERM displays:
Configuration file currently loaded:
A:TSO.SET
If you are using the default configuration file, FTTERwI
displays DEFAULT.SET. It does not report which file
has been selected as the default.
3-19
Disconnecting from the Host
When you finish a host session, follow these steps to
disconnect from the host:
1. Log off from the host system using the normal
procedure for the host. (This step is optional. There
may be times when you want to temporarily disconnect
without logging off.)
2. Press the FTTERM key sequence (default is Alt-F8) to
return to the file transfer menu.
3. Press Alt-F6 to disconnect from the host. This step
causes the communication line with the host, 3708, or
3710 8-PA to be dropped (DSR goes low).
This procedure has the same effect on the communication
link as turning the PC off and back on. When you return
to the host session, you must repeat the procedures under
"Starting a Host Session" on page 3-6.
Displaying FTTERM's Help
Windows
FTTERM and FTSETUP provide help windows when you
press Alt- F1.
You can display a help window when Alt-Fl = HELP
appears at the bottom of the display.
FTTERM provides help menus for the File Transfer Main
Menu, the File Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation,
the FTSETUP Function Selection Menu, the Auto-Dial
Definition Menu, and the Key Definition Menu.
Figure 3-4 on page 3-21 shows the Help Main Menu for
the File Transfer Main Menu (for protocol conversion).
3-20
You are encouraged to use the help windows as a primary
source of information about FTTERM.
FILE TRANSFER MAIN MENU
MODE: CONCURRENT
HELP: Main Menu
Use the cursor control keys or the tab keys to move the cursor
to the topic for which you want help.
Then press Enter.
You
must RETURN from help before issuing a command. Only the keys
shown at the bottom of the window are valid while in help.
Commands
General Topics
SEND
Switch to HOST/PC DOS
Help on HELP
Entering Commands
RECEIVE
Connect to Host
BATCH
DISConnect from Host
Command Parameters
LOAD
Messages (MSGS)
SEND Options
MODE
RETRIEVE/COLOR
RECEIVE Options
Alt-F1
= HELP ON HELP
ALT-F2 = RETURN PgDn = FORWARD PgUp = BACK
===>
Alt-F1 = HELP Alt-F2 = RETURN
Alt-F6 = DISC Alt-F7 = MSGS Alt-FB ~ FTTERM
Figure
3-4.
Alt-F4 = RETRIEVE AIt-F5 = COLOR
Alt-F9 == PC DOS _. -- AIt-F10= HOST
The Help Main Menu (for Protocol Conversion)
Use the following procedures to find the information you
need and to return to the function you were doing:
•
To select a topic from a help menu, move the cursor to
the topic and press the Enter key.
•
To proceed through a topic, press the PgUp and PgDn
keys.
•
To return from a topic to the help menu, press Alt-F3.
•
To return from a topic or the help menu to FTTERM
or FTSETUP, press Alt-F2.
3-21
Editing FTTERM Commands
You can use the keys listed in Figure 3-5 to change and
retrieve commands that you are entering on a file transfer
menu.
Key
Function
[]
Moves the cursor left without
erasing.
D
Moves the cursor right without
erasing.
c:J
EJ
EJ
EJ
EJ I
EJEJ
IHome
Figure
3-22
Turns insert mode on and off.
Deletes the character under the
cursor.
Moves the cursor to the
beginning of the command.
Moves the cursor to the end of
the command.
Erases the entire command line
and returns to the beginning of
the command line.
Erases the command line starting
at the cursor position.
3-5 (Part 1 of 2).
FTTERM Command Editing Keys
Key
Function
EJ [:J
Retrieves the previous command.
Pressed repeatedly, retrieves up
to the last five commands. Not valid
while making a menu selection.
Figure
3-5 (Part 2 of 2).
FTTERM Command Editing Keys
Using an AUTOEXEC.BAT File
You can use an AUTOEXEC.BAT file to automatically
start FTTERM when DOS is loaded. The file must reside
on the FTTERM working diskette or in the root directory
if you have a fixed disk system.
You can create an AUTOEXEC.BAT file using any text
editor. The file must contain the following lines:
DATE
TIME
FTTERM
If you are already using an AUTOEXEC.BAT file that
performs other functions, you can try adding the
preceding lines to the beginning of the existing file.
When other resident programs are being used, you may
have to experiment with the order. See "Using FTTERM
with Other Resident Programs" on page 3-26.
Refer to the IB11 PC DOS Reference for more details on
creating batch files like AUTOEXEC.BAT.
Entering Commands from the DOS
Prompt
FTTERM lets you enter the SEND and RECEIVE file
transfer commands from the DOS system prompt (A> ,
B>, C ». See Chapter 4, "Transferring Files Using the
Protocol Conversion rv1ethod" for a description of the
SEND and RECEIVE commands.
Exiting from FTTERM
Normally, you can use other PC programs while FTTERl\f
is loaded in memory. However, if you need the memory
space, you can exit from FTTERM, clearing it from
memory, in either of two ways:
•
Reset the PC with the Ctrl-Alt-Del key sequence.
After loading DOS, do not load FTTERM. If FTTERlVI
is loaded with an AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you can
interrupt the loading with Ctrl-C.
•
Load FTTERM in nonresident mode. When you are
finished with it, press the EXIT key sequence (default
is Alt-F9). Then load the other PC program. See
"Using FTTERM in Nonresident Mode" for more
informa tion.
Using FTTERM in Nonresident
Mode
In the normal resident mode, FTTERM is loaded as a
resident extension to DOS. FTTERM stays in memory
when you load another PC program, allowing
simultaneous FTTERM and PC DOS sessions. However,
FTTERM is occupying memory space that would
otherwise be available to the PC program. This is true
regardless of whether you are using FTTERM in
concurrent or nonconcurrent mode.
In nonresident mode, FTTERM is not loaded as a resident
extension to DOS, so you cannot have simultaneous
FTTERM and PC DOS sessions. Instead, DOS loads
FTTERM as a typical PC program.
3-24
You can use nonresident mode in the following situations:
•
You are using a PC program that is too large to fit in
the PC's memory simultaneously with FTTERM.
•
You are using a PC program that runs faster or
handles more data when it has more memory available.
•
You are using another resident PC program that
cannot coreside with FTTERM.
To load FTTERM in nonresident mode, include the N
option on the command line:
FTTERM N
Note: In nonresident mode, the file
transfer menu lists an EXIT key
sequence (default is Alt-F9) instead of
the PC DOS key sequence.
When you press EXIT, FTTERM is cleared from memory
and control returns to DOS. However, the link with the
host is not dropped unless you used the DISConnect key
sequence (Alt-F6). You can exit from the PC program and
start FTTERM again to continue the host session.
Keep in mind the following requirements when using
FTTERM in nonresident mode:
•
You cannot switch between concurrent and
nonconcurrent mode. Nonresident implies
nonconcurren t.
•
If a PC program needs access to the same
asynchronous port used by FTTERM, disconnect from
the host (Alt-F6) before exiting from FTTERM.
•
You cannot copy a PC screen to a PC file or printer in
nonresident mode.
•
Do not exit to DOS during a file transfer. Terminate
the transfer first.
3-25
•
Some hosts automatically drop the connection if you
do not reconnect within a certain time limit.
Using FTTERM with Other
Resident Programs
When you load FTTERM in the normal resident mode,
there is a potential conflict between FTTERM and other
resident programs (such as print spoolers, desktop
managers, network programs, and other terminal
emulators).
If a conflict occurs, try loading the programs in a different
order. In particular, try loading FTTERM last. You can
use FTTERM in nonresident mode if necessary. See
"Using FTTERM in Nonresident Mode" on page 3-24 for
more information.
FTTERM is compatible with all terminate and stay
resident programs supplied with PC DOS.
FT'TERM Reserved Words
FTTERM and PC DOS use the following words to
represent sources and destinations other than files (such
as the PC printer) for file transfers. They are reserved in
both uppercase and lowercase. Avoid using these as
filenames at the host or PC, because FTTERM will
interpret them differently from the way you intend.
AUX
COMI
COM2
CON
HaS
8-26
HOSCREEN
LPTI
LPT2
LPT3
NUL
PCS
PCSCREEN
PRN
Chapter 4. Transferring Files
Using the Protocol Conversion
Method
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Starting a File Transfer ..............
The File Transfer Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a SEND Command ..............
Sending a PC DOS File to a Host File ......
Running a PC Program During a File
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Sending a PC File to a Host
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping a File Transfer .............
Sending a PC DOS File to the PC Printer
Running a PC Program During a Printout
Example of Sending a PC DOS File to the
PC Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping a Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending a PC DOS Screen to the PC Printer
Sending a Host Screen to a Host File ......
Example of Sending a Host Screen to a
Host File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending a PC DOS Screen to a Host File ...
Example of Sending a PC DOS Screen to a
Host File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a RECEIVE Command ..........
Receiving a PC DOS File from a Host File ..
Running a PC Program During a File
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Receiving a PC DOS File from
a Host File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping a File Transfer .............
Receiving a PC DOS File from a PC DOS
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-6
4-6
4-8
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-24
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-1
Example of Receiving a PC DOS File from
a PC DOS Screen ..................
Receiving a Host File to the PC Printer ....
Running a PC Program During a Printout
Example of Receiving a Host File to the
PC Printer .......................
Stopping a Printout .................
Receiving a PC DOS File from a Host Screen
Example of Receiving a PC DOS file from
a Host Screen ....................
Receiving a Host Screen to the PC Printer ..
Using a Batch File to Transfer Multiple Files ..
Creating the Batch File ................
Processing the Batch File ...............
Batch Transfer Status Messages ..........
Stopping the Batch File Processing .......
Entering SEND and RECEIVE Commands in the
PC DOS Session ........................
Host Considerations ......................
VM/CMS Hosts .......................
Preparing for File Transfer ...........
Command Formats ..................
MVS/TSO Hosts ......................
Preparing for File Transfer ...........
Command Formats ..................
CICS and IWS Hosts .. -. .. ~ ... -. .. .- . -. --. :- . .Preparing for File Transfer ...........
Command Formats ..................
SEND and RECEIVE Command Options ......
Basic Options for VM/CMS and MVS/TSO
. Hosts .............................
Basic Options for CICS and IWS Hosts .....
Option Definitions ....................
4-2
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-32
4-32
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-35
4-36
4-37
4-39
4-39
4-40
4-41
4-41
4-42
4-43
4-43
4-44
4-46
4-46
4-46
4-48
4-48
4-50
4-51
About this Chapter
This chapter describes transferring files using the protocol
conversion method. This is the preferred file transfer
method for a SNA host that has one of the host file
transfer programs commonly referred to as IND$FILE or
Intelligent Workstation Support (IWS). See "Required
Software" on page 1-14 for specific program numbers.
For transferring files with ASCII or SNA hosts using the
native emulation method, see Chapter 5, "Transferring
Files Using the Native Emulation Method."
This chapter also describes the following procedures:
•
Selecting the appropriate command options for the
type of data you are transferring and the type of host
you are using
•
Transferring multiple files using a batch file
•
Entering file transfer commands in the PC DOS
seSSIon.
Before Starting a File Transfer
Before you start a file transfer, be sure that:
•
You made and configured a working copy of FTTERM
as described in Chapter 2, "Preparing to Use
FTTERM."
•
You have used FTSETUP to create an appropriate
configuration file for FTTERM to communicate with
your host. See Appendix C,"Creating and Modifying
Configuration Files."
4-3
•
You started FTTERM and established a host session as
described in Chapter 3, "Using FTTERM."
•
You are "not currently running a host program (the
host must be in the command ready state). See "Host
Considerations" on page 4-40 for details on verifying
that the host is in the command ready state.
•
If receiving a file, you have enough disk space at the
PC to contain the file.
•
If sending a file, you have enough space allocated to
you at the host to contain the file.
The File Transfer Main Menu
The File Transfer Main Menu (Figure 4-1) is the starting
point for all file transfers using the protocol conversion
method.
4-4
FILE TRANSFER MAIN MENU
MODE: CONCURRENT
10
Command
Description
1
SEND
RECEIVE
BATCH
LOAD
MODE
Send data from PC
Receive data to PC
Send/Receive multiple files
Load a configuration file
Toggle nonconcurrent and concurrent
2
3
4
S
Type an 10 number or Command and press ENTER.
===>
Alt-F1 = HELP Alt-F2 = RETURN
Alt-F6 = DISC Alt-F7 = MSGS Alt-F8 = FTTERM
Figure
4-1.
Alt-F4 = RETRIEVE Alt-FS = COLOR
Alt-F9 = PC DOS
AIt-F10 = HOST
The File Transfer Main Menu (Protocol Conversion)
The following sections cover only the file transfer
commands SEND,RECEIVE, and BATC_H~ ____ _
See Appendix B, "FTTERM Menus," for a description of
each item on the File Transfer Main Menu.
See Chapter 3, "Using FTTERM," for instructions on
displaying the File Transfer Main Menu and switching
between FTTERM functions.
For specific information on the LOAD and MODE
commands, see:
•
"Loading a Configuration File" on page 3-18
•
"Selecting Concurrent or Nonconcurrent rvlode" on
page 3-17.
Sending a File
This section describes how to transfer:
•
From a PC file to:
Host file
PC printer.
•
From a display screen generated in the PC DOS
session to:
PC printer
Host file.
•
From a display screen generated in the host session to
a host file.
Entering a SEND Command
You can enter a SEND command in several ways:
•
Display the SEND command formats by entering a 1 at
the arrow (= = = > ) prompt. (You can also enter
SEND or S.)
The procedures in this section use this method.
•
If you already know the SEND command formats, you
can save time by entering a complete SEND command
at the arrow prompt as a single step. Begin the
command with SEND, S, or 1. The following examples
prod uce the same result:
= = = > SEND B:TEXT.DOC TEXT SCRIPT (ASCII CRLF
= = = > S B:TEXT.DOC TEXT SCRIPT (ASCII CRLF
= = = > 1 B:TEXT.DOC TEXT SCRIPT (ASCII CRLF
4-6
Note: You can press Alt-F 4 to
retrieve previous commands. See
Figure 3-5 on page 3-22 for
additional keys that are useful when
entering a command.
•
You can also enter a SEND command in the PC DOS
session. See "Entering SEND and RECEIVE
Commands in the PC DOS Session" on page 4-39.
The procedure for entering a SEND command consists of
these steps:
1. Enter a 1 at the arrow prompt on the File Transfer
Main Menu. The Send Command Format window
(Figure 4-2 on page 4-8) appears.
2. Finish typing the SEND command by supplying the
source, destination, and options for the file transfer.
The following sections provide detailed procedures for
entering specific SEND commands.
Note: If you want to quit without
sending any files, press the RETURN
key sequence (Alt-F2) to return to
the File Transfer Main Menu. (You
also get the same result by pressing
the Enter key without typing a
command.)
3. Press the Enter key.
4-7
FILE TRANSFER MAIN MENU
MODE: CONCURRENT
SEND COMMAND FORMAT
Send PC DOS file to Host file
Use this FORMAT: [d:][\path\)filename[.ext] fn ft fm (options
-
-
Send PC DOS file to PC Printer
Use this FORMAT: [d:][\path\]filename[.ext] PRN
-
Send PC DOS Screen to PC Printer
Use this FORMAT: PCSCREEN PRN
-
Send Host Screen to Host file
Use this FORMAT: HOSCREEN fn ft fm
-
Send PC DOS Screen to Host file
Use this FORMAT: PCSCREEN fn ft fm (options
Type Format and press ENTER.
===>
Alt-Fl = HELP Alt-F2= RETURN
Alt-F7 = MSGS Alt-FB = FTTERM Alt-F9-= PC DOS -- -AU-FlO = HOST
Figure
4-2.
The Send Command Format Window. The host
filename format shown (jn it im) is for VM/CMS hosts.
When you transfer a file with a different host, the
filename format for that host appears instead. FTTERM
determines which type of host you are using from the
configuration file.
Sending a PC DOS File to a Host File
This option lets you send a PC file to a host file. The file
you send can be an alphanumeric file, such as a document
or source code, or a binary file, such as a COM or EXE
file.
To send a PC DOS file to a host file, do the following:
1. Starting at the File Transfer Main Menu, display the
Send Command Format window (Figure 4-2 on
page 4-8) by entering a 1.
2. Type the identifiers for the PC DOS file and the host
file, plus any options you want to specify, as described
in the Send Command Format window. (FTTERM
supplies the SEND part of the command.)
If the command is longer than one line, it
automatically wraps to the next line, allowing a
maximum of 149 characters per command.
The SEND command formats are:
•
VMjCMS:
SEND [d:][\pathVfilename.ext fn ft fm (options
•
MVSjTSO:
SEND [d:][\pathVfilename.ext
'data.set.name[(member.name)1 '[jpasswDrd] (options
•
CICS and IWS:
SEND [d:] {\pathVfilename.ext fn (options)
[comments]
Figure 4-3 lists the available SEND command options.
Note: See "SEND and RECEIVE
Command Options" on page 4-48 for
an explanation of each SEND
command option.
3. Press the Enter key.
4-D
Host Type
VM/CMS
SEND Options
Highlight = Default option
. Bar (I) = Select one of the choices
APPEND
ASCII
CRLF
LRECL n
RECFM VIF
Binary is the default data type.
ASCII and CRLF are commonly used
for alphanumeric (text) files.
MVS/TSO
APPEND
ASCII
BLKSIZE(n)
CRLF
LRECL(n)
RECFM(FIVIU)
SPACE(n1,n2) AVBLOCK(n)
SPACE(n1,n2) CYLINDERS
SPACE(n1,n2) TRACKS
Binary is the default data type.
ASCII and CRLF are commonly used
for alphanumeric (text) files.
ASCII and CRLF are the only valid
options for members of a partitioned
data set. 80 characters is the default
length for fixed length records.
Figure
4-10
4-3 (Part 1 of 2).
SEND Command Options
Host Type
SEND Options
Highlight = Default option
Bar (I) = Select one of the choices
CICS
ASCIlIBINARY
CRLFINOCRLF
IWS
ASCIlIBINARY
BLANK
CRLFINOCRLF
NOREPLACEI REPLACE
FILE = HTFI FILE = TS
If FILE = HTF:
FOR = usid1 ,... ,usidB
PRIVATEIPUBLIC
TYPE = EDITITYPE = PRINT
If FILE =TS:
QNAME = CFTRxxxx
PROGRAM = CFTRxxxx
Depending on the level of VSE/SP, not
all options may be available. See the
VSE/SP documentation listed under
"Related Manuals" on page viii for the
options that apply to a specific
environment.
Figure
4-3 (Part 2 of 2).
SEND Command Options
When the file transfer starts, the Transfer Status window
(Figure 4-4 on page 4-12) appears. This window informs
you about the progress of the transfer.
4-11
FILE TRANSFER MAIN MENU
MODE: CONCURRENT
Currently moving data
From
To
: PCDOS.FIL
: HOSTFILE TYPE A1
Bytes moved: 662 of 18228
Type T to terminate the file transfer.
===>
SEND PCDOS.FIL HOSTFILE TYPE A 1 (ASCII CRLF
Alt-F1 = HELP
Figure
4-4.
Alt-F7 = MSGS
Alt-Fa = FTTERM Alt-F9 = PC DOS
Alt-F10 = HOST
The Transfer Status Window
When the file transfer is finished, one of the following
messages appears in the Transfer Status window:
TRANS03 File transfer complete.
return to main menu.
Type any key to
or
INW0001I File transfer complete.
return to main menu.
Type any key to
Press any key to return to the File Transfer Main Menu.
If another message appears, the file transfer may not have
finished successfully. See Appendix A, "File Transfer
Messages," for an explanation and response.
4-1 :2
Running a PC Program During a File
Transfer
In concurrent mode, you can press the PC DOS session
key sequence (default is Alt-F9) to run a PC program
while the file is being transferred.
You can return to the Transfer Status window from the
PC DOS session by pressing the FTTERM key sequence
(default is Alt-FS). The PC program is suspended until
you return to the PC DOS session.
Examples of Sending a PC File to a Host
File
•
VMjCMS:
SEND B:SALES.DOC SALES SCRIPT Al (ASCII CRLF
APPEND
This command appends PC text file SALES.DOC
located on drive B to file SALES SCRIPT on your
CMS A disk. The ASCII and CRLF options are
commonly used with text files.
SEND C:\RECFILS\COBOL.DAT INPUT COB Al (ASCII CRLF
LRECL 132 RECFM F
This command sends alphanumeric PC data file
COBOL.DAT located in path \RECFILS\ on drive C. It
creates a new file INPUT COB on your CMS A disk
with a fixed record length of 132 characters .
•
MVSjTSO:
SEND C:\SCHEDS\PROJECTl ·SCHEDS.sCRIPT(PROJl),
(ASCII CRLF
This command sends PC text file PROJECT1 located in
path \SCHEDS\ on drive C to TSO member
PROGRAM, belonging to data set SOURCE.FORT.
The ASCII and CRLF options are commonly used with
text files.
4-13
SEND C:\FORTRAN\ANALYZE.FTN 'SOURCE.FORT' (ASCII
CRLF LRECL(132) BLKSIZE(132) RECFM(V) SPACE (20,10)
TRACKS
.
This command sends Fortran source code
(alphanumeric) PC file ANAL YZE.FTN located in path
\FORTRAN\ on drive C. It creates the sequential data
set SOURCE.FORT. The records in the data set may
vary in length up to 132 characters. The data blocks
are the same length as the records. TSO allocates 20
tracks for the data set. If more tracks are needed, TSO
allocates them in groups of 10.
•
CICS:
SEND MEMO.BAT MEMOl
This command sends PC file MEMO.BAT on the
default drive to the CICS temporary storage queue for
printing and distribution by a user program .
•
IWS:
SEND B:MYPROG.EXE BASPROG (BINARY FOR=FRED
REPLACE
This command sends compiled BAsIC (bi.riary) file
MYPROG.EXE from PC drive B to the IWS Host
Transfer File for retrieval by the user whose CICS
userID is FRED. If a file named BASPROG already
exists at the host, it will be replaced.
Stopping a File Transfer
If you decide to stop a file transfer before it is complete:
1. Return to the Transfer Status window (if you have
switched to another function) by pressing the
FTTERM key sequence (default is Alt-FS).
2. Press T to stop the transfer. This message appears:
Arc you sure that you wish to terminate?
4-14
(Y or
~):
3. Enter a Y to confirm. (If you decide not to terminate
the transfer, enter an N.) When you enter a Y, these
messages appear in sequence:
Waiting for host response to termination request.
Termination is complete.
to main menu.
Type any key to return
4. Press any key to return to the File Transfer Main
Menu.
Any part of the file that was already sent to the host is
present in the host file.
Sending a PC DOS File to the PC
Printer
This option lets you print on the PC printer any file from
a PC disk. If you are using FTTERM in concurrent mode,
you can run another PC program while the file is
printing.
The PC DOS file you print can be any file that is stored
on a PC disk. You would normally print alphanumeric
files, but some devices, such as certain plotters, print
binary files.
Note: If you are using FTTERM in
concurrent mode, do not perform any
print operations from the PC DOS
session while printing a PC DOS file.
Also, do not edit or delete the file being
printed.
To send a PC DOS file to the PC printer, do the following:
1. Be sure that the printer is turned on, is online, and
has a supply of paper.
4-15
2. Starting at the File Transfer Main Menu, display the
Send Command Format window (Figure 4-2 on
page 4-8) by entering a 1.
3. Type the complete PC filename as described in the
Send Command Format window. (FTTERM supplies
the SEND part of the command.)
The format for sending a PC file to the printer is:
SEND [d:}[\pathVfilenanle.ext PRN
4. Press the Enter key.
When the printing starts, the Transfer Status window
(Figure 4-4 on page 4-12) appears. This window
informs you about the progress of the printing.
Running a PC Program During a Printout
In concurrent mode, you can press the PC DOS session
key sequence (default is Alt-F9) to run a PC program
while the file is being printed. Do not perform any print
operations from the PC DOS session while the file is being
printed.
You can return to the Transfer Status window from the
PC DOS session by entering the FTTERM key sequence
(default is Alt-F8).
Example of Sending a PC DOS File to the
PC Printer
SEND C:\LETTERS\MEMO.DOC PRN
This command prints PC file MEMO.DOC in path
\LETTERS\ on drive C.
4-16
Stopping a Printout
If you decide to stop the printout before it is complete,
follow these steps:
1. Return to the Transfer Status window (if you have
switched to another function) by pressing the
FTTERM key sequence (default is Alt-FS).
2. Press T to stop the printing.
3. Press any key to return to the File Transfer :Nlain
Menu.
Sending a PC DOS Screen to the PC
Printer
This option lets you print on the PC printer the contents
of a display screen generated during a PC DOS session.
Note: This option is valid for text
mode displays only. You cannot switch
out of the PC DOS session if the display
is in graphics mode. In addition,
FTTERM must be running in the
normal (resident) mode.
To send a PC DOS screen to the PC printer, do the
following:
1.
Be sure the printer is turned on, is online, and has a
supply of paper.
2. In the PC DOS session, display the screen that you
want to print.
3. Switch to the File Transfer Main Menu using the
FTTERM key sequence (default is Alt-FS).
4. Display the Send Command Format window
(Figure 4-2 on page 4-S) by entering a 1.
4-17
5. Type the SEND command as described in the Send
Command Format window. (FTTERM supplies the
SEND part of the command.)
The format for printing a PC display screen is:
SEND
PCSCREEN' PRN
6. Press the Enter key to start printing. You cannot
switch to another function while the printing is in
progress.
7. When the printing is finished, press the PC DOS key
sequence (default is Alt-F9) to return to the PC DOS
seSSIon.
Sending a Host Screen to a Host File
This option lets you copy to a host file the contents of a
display screen that was generated during a host session.
For example, you can use the FILE LIST command and
store the resulting screen of filelist data as a document
file. Because the host must be in the command ready
state when you create the file; the applications· of-this·
capability are limited.
To send a host screen to a host file, do the following:
1. In the host session, display the screen that you want to
send.
2. Switch to the File Transfer Main Menu using the
FTTERM key sequence (default is Alt-'F8).
3. Display the Send Command Format window
(Figure 4-2 on page 4-8) by entering a 1.
4. Type the SEND command as described in the Send
Command Format window. (FTTERM supplies the
SEND part of the command.)
4-18
The formats for sending a host screen to a host file
are:
•
VM/CMS:
SEND HOSCREEN fn ft fm [(APPEND]
•
MVS/TSO:
SEND HOSCREEN
'data.set.name(member.name)'/password [(APPEND]
•
CICS and IWS:
SEND HOSCREEN fn
Note that APPEND is the only valid option for this
type of transfer. Using APPEND causes the screen
data to be added to the end of an existing file ..
You cannot switch to another function while the
transfer is in progress.
5. When the transfer is finished, press the host session
key sequence (default is _A1t-F~O) to return to the host
sessIon.
Example of Sending a Host Screen to a
Host File
SEND HOSCREEN SCREEN SCRIPT
This command saves the host screen in file SCREEN
SCRIPT on the CMS A disk (by default).
4-19
Sending a PC DOS Screen to a Host
File
This option lets you copy to a host file the contents of a
display screen generated during a PC DOS session. For
example, you can save a chart generated by a PC
application program for later inclusion in a
host-generated document.
Note: This option is valid for text
mode displays only. You cannot switch
out of the PC DOS session if the display
is in graphics mode. In addition,
FTTERM must be running in the
normal (resident) mode.
To send a PC DOS screen to a host file, do the following:
1. In the PC DOS session, display the screen that you
want to save.
2. Switch to the File Transfer Main Menu using the
FTTERM key sequence (default is Alt-F8).
3. Display the Send Command Format window
(Figure 4-2 on page 4-8) by entering a 1.
4. Type the SEND command as described in the SEND
COMMAND FORMAT window. (FTTERMsupplies
the SEND part of the command.)
The formats for sending a PC DOS screen to a host file
are:
•
VM/CMS:
SEND PCSCREEN fn ft fm [(APPEND]
•
MVS/TSO:
SEND PCSCREEN
'data.set.name( member.name)' /password [(APPEND]
4-20
•
CICS and IWS:
SEND PCSCREEN {n
Note that APPEND is the only valid option for this
type of transfer. Using APPEND causes the screen
data to be added to the end of an existing file.
You cannot switch to another function while the
transfer is in progress.
5. When the transfer is finished, press the PC DOS key
sequence (default is Alt-F9) to return to the PC DOS
seSSIon.
Example of Sending a PC DOS Screen to a
Host File
SEND PCSCREEN CICSSCRN
This command saves the PC DOS screen in file
CICSSCRN in the CICS temporary storage queue.
Receiving a File
This section describes how to transfer:
•
From a host file to:
-
•
PC DOS file
PC printer.
From a display screen generated by a host program to:
PC file
PC printer.
•
From a display screen generated by a PC DOS program
to a PC DOS file.
-1-21
Entering a RECEIVE Command
You can enter a RECEIVE command in several ways:
•
Display the RECEIVE command formats by entering a
2 at the arrow ( = = = > ) prompt. (You can also enter
RECEIVE or R.)
The procedures in this section use this method.
•
If you already know the RECEIVE command formats,
you can save time by entering a complete RECEIVE
command at the arrow prompt as a single step. Begin
the command with RECEIVE, R, or 2. The following
examples produce the same result:
= = = > RECEIVE B:TEXT.DOC TEXT SCRIPT (ASCII CRLF
= = = > R B:TEXT.DOC TEXT SCRIPT (ASCII CRLF
= = = > 2 B:TEXT.DOC TEXT SCRIPT (ASCII CRLF
Note: You can press Alt-F4 to
retrieve previous commands. See
Figure 3-5 on page 3-22 for
additional keys, that are useful when-en tering a command.
•
You can also enter a RECEIVE command in the PC
DOS session. See "Entering SEND and RECEIVE
Commands in the PC DOS Session" on page 4-39.
The procedure for entering a RECEIVE command consists
of these steps:
1.
Enter a 2 at the arrow prompt on the File Transfer
Main Menu. The Receive Command Format window
(Figure 4-5) appears.
2. Finish typing the RECEIVE command by supplying
the source, destination, and options for the file
transfer. The following sections provide detailed
procedures for entering specific RECEIVE commands.
4-22
Note: If you want to quit without
receiving any files, press the
RETURN key sequence (Alt-F2) to
return to the File Transfer Main
Menu. (You also get the same result
by pressing the Enter key without
typing a command.)
3. Press the Enter key.
FILE TRANSFER MAIN MENU
MODE: CONCURRENT
RECEIVE COMMAND FORMAT
Receive to PC DOS file from Host file
Use this FORMAT: [d:}[\path\]filename[.ext] tn ft 1m (options
-
-
Receive to PC DOS file from PC DOS screen
Use this FORMAT: PCSCREEN [d:][\path\]tilename[.ext]
-
Receive to PC printer from Host file
Use this FORMAT: PRN fn ft fm
Receive to PC DOS file from Host screen -Use this FORMAT: [d:][\path\]filename[.ext1 HOSCREEN
-
Receive to PC printer from Host screen
Use this FORMAT: PRN HOSCREEN
Type Format and press ENTER.
===>
Alt-F1 = HELP Alt-F2= RETURN
Alt-F7 = MSGS Alt-FS = FTTERM Alt-F9 = PC DOS
Figure
4-5.
AIt-F 10 = HOST
The Receive Command Format Window. The host
filename format shown (jn ft fm) is for VMjC),1S hosts.
When you transfer a file with a different host, the
filename format for that host appears instead. FTTERM
determines which type of host you are using from the
configuration file.
4-23
Receiving a PC DOS File from a Host
File
This option lets you copy to a PC file any host file to
which you have access. The file you receive can be an
alphanumeric file, such as a document or source code, or
it can be a binary file, such as a compiled program.
To receive a PC DOS file from a host file, do the
following:
1. Starting at the File Transfer Main Menu, display the
Receive Command Format window (Figure 4-5 on
page 4-23) by entering a 2.
2. Type the identifiers for the PC DOS file and the host
file, plus any options that you want to specify, as
described in the Receive Command F.ormat window.
(FTTERM supplies the RECEIVE part of the
command.)
If the command is longer than one line, it
automatically wraps to the next line, allowing a
maximum of 149 characters per command.
The RECEIVE command formats are:
•
VMjCMS:
RECEIVE [d:][\pathVfilename.ext fn ft fm
(options
•
MVSjTSO:
RECEIVE [d:J[\pathVfilename.ext
'data.set.name[( member.name)] '[/passwordJ (options
•
CICS and IWS:
RECEIVE [d:][\pathVfilename.ext fn (options
Figure 4-6 on page 4-25 lists the available RECEIVE
command options.
~-24
Note: See "SEND and RECEIVE
Command Options" on page 4-48 for
an explanation of each RECEIVE
command option.
3. Press the Enter key.
Host Type
VM/CMS
RECEIVE Options
Highlight = Default option
Bar (I) = Select one of the choices
APPEND
ASCII
CRLF
Binary is the default data type.
ASCII and CRLF are commonly used
for alphanumeric (text) files.
MVS/TSO
APPEND
ASCII
CRLF
Binary is the default data type.
ASCII and CRLF are commonly used
for alphanumeric (text) files.
CICS
Figure
APPEND
ASCIlIBINARY
CRLFINOCRLF
4-6 (Part 1 of 2).
RECEIVE Command Options
4-25
Host Type
IW8
RECEIVE Options
Highlight = Default option
Bar (I) = Select one of the choices
ASCIlIBINARY
BLANK
CRLFINOCRLF
REPLACEIAPPEND
FILE = HTFIFILE =T8
If FILE = HTF:
FROM=usid
DELETEIKEEP
If FILE=T8:
QNAME = CFTRxxxx
PROGRAM = CFTRxxxx
Depending on the level of VSE/SP, not
all options may be available. See the
VSE/SP documentation listed under
"Related Manuals" on page viii for the
options that apply to a specific
environment.
Figure
4-6 (Part 2 of 2).
RECEIVE Command Options
When the file transfer starts, the Transfer Status window
(Figure 4-4 on page 4-12) appears. This window informs
you about the progress of the transfer.
When the file transfer is finished, one of the following
messages appears in the Transfer Status window:
THANS03 File transfer complete.
return to main menu.
Type any :-<:.ev to
or
:!:-' ile transfer complete.
n~\'IOOO 11
return co main menu.
Type any :<ey -::0
Press any key to return to the File Transfer l\1ain l\1enu.
4-26
If another message appears, the file transfer may not nave
finished successfully. See Appendix A, "File Transfer
Messages," for an explanation and response.
Running a PC Program During a File
Transfer
In concurrent mode, you can press the PC DOS session
key sequence (default is Alt-F9) to run a PC program
while the file is being received from the host.
You can return to the Transfer Status window from the
PC DOS session by entering the FTTERM key sequence
(default is Alt-FS).
Examples of Receiving a PC DOS File from
a Host File
•
VM/CMS:
RECEIVE PROG.JCL PROGRAM JCL Bl (ASCII CRLF
This command receives text file PROGRAM JCL from
the eMS B disk into PC file PROG.-JCL orr-the default drive. The ASCII and CRLF options are commonly
used with text files.
RECEIVE A:\UTILITY\SCHEDULE.EXE SCHEDULE BIN Ml
This command receives binary file SCHEDULE BIN
from the CMS M disk into PC file SCHEDULE.EXE in
path \UTILITY\ on drive A .
•
MVS/TSO:
RECEIVE PCFILE.TXT 'TSODSET.SCRIPT(MEMBER), (ASCII
CRLF
This command receives MEMBER in data set
TSODSET.SCRIPT to PCFILE.TXT on the current PC
drive. The ASCII and CRLF options are commonly
used with text files.
4-27
RECEIVE A:\UTILS\MAP.EXE 'UTILS.BAS'/CANARY
This command receives binary TSO data set
UTILS.BAS into PC file MAP.EXE in path \UTILS\ on
drive A. The data set has the password CANARY.
•
CICS:
RECEIVE MEMO.BAT MEMOI
This command receives alphanumeric PC file
MEMO.BAT on the default drive from the CICS
temporary storage queue .
•
IWS:
RECEIVE B:MYLIST AUGPRICE (FROM = USRI APPEND
This command appends AUGPRICE from the IWS Host
Transfer File to PC alphanumeric file MYLIST on
drive B. The file was sent earlier by USERI with the
PUBLIC option.
Stopping a File Transfer
If you decide to stop a file transfer before it is complete:
1. Return to the Transfer Status window (if you have
swi tched to another function) by pressing the
FTTERM key sequence (default is Alt-F8).
2. Press T to stop the transfer. This message appears:
Are you sure that you wish to terminate? (Y or N) :
3. Enter a Y to confirm. (If you decide not to terminate
the transfer, enter an N instead.) When you enter a Y,
these messages appear in sequence:
Waiting for host response to termination request.
Termination is complete.
to main menu.
4-28
Type any key to
retur~
4. Press any key to return to the File
Menu.
TranbJ.~ ... ' __
Any part of the file that was already received at the PC is
present in the PC file.
Receiving a PC DOS File from a PC
DOS Screen
This option lets you copy the contents of a display screen
that was generated during a PC DOS session into a PC
file. You can use the DIR command and store the
resulting directory as a document file, or you can store a
spreadsheet display for later inclusion in a document.
Note: This option is valid for text
mode displays only. You cannot switch
out of the PC DOS session if the display
is in graphics mode. In addition,
FTTERM must be running in the
normal (resident) mode.
To receive a PC DOS file from a PC DOS screen, do the
following:
1. In the PC DOS session, display the screen that you
want to receive.
2. Switch to the File Transfer Main Menu using the
FTTERM key sequence (default is Alt-FS).
3.
Access the Receive Command Format window
(Figure 4-5 on page 4-23) by entering a 2.
4. Type the RECEIVE command as described in the
Receive COlnmand Fonnat window. (FTTERM supplies
the RECEIVE part of the command.)
The format for receiving a PC file from a PC screen is:
RECEIVE [d:][\path Vfilename.ext PCSCREEN
[(APPEND]
4-29
Note that APPEND is the only valid option for this
type of transfer. Using APPEND causes the screen
data to be added to the end of an existing file.
5. Press the Enter key to create the file. You cannot
switch to another function while the transfer is in
progress.
6. When the transfer is finished, press the PC DOS key
sequence (default is Alt-F9) to return to the PC DOS
seSSIon.
Example of Receiving a PC DOS File from
a PC DOS Screen
RECEIVE A:SCREEN.TXT PCSCREEN
This command saves the PC display screen in PC file
SCREEN.TXT on drive A.
Receiving a Host File to the PC
Printer
This option lets you print on the PC printer any host file
to which you have access. You normally print
alphanumeric host files, such as those you can view and
edit during a host session. However, some devices (such
as certain plotters) print binary files.
To receive a host file to the PC printer, do the following:
1. Be sure the printer is turned on, is online, and has a
supply of paper.
2. Starting at the File Transfer Main Menu, display the
Receive Command Format window (Figure 4-5 on
page 4-23) by entering a 2.
3. Type the complete host filename as described in the
Receive Command Format window. (FTTERM supplies
the RECEIVE part of the command.)
4-30
The formats for receiving a host file to the PC printer
are:
•
VM/CMS:
RECEIVE PRN fn ft fm (options
•
MVS/TSO:
RECEIVE PRN 'data.set.name[(member.name)] ,
f/password] (options
•
CICS and IWS:
RECEIVE PRN fn (options
See Figure 4-6 on page 4-25 for a list of available
command options.
4. Press the Enter key.
5. When the printing starts, the Transfer Status window
(Figure 4-4 on page 4-12) appears. This window
informs you about the progress of the printing.
Running a PC Program During a Printout
In concurrent mode, you can press the PC DOS session
key sequence (default is Alt-F9) to run a PC program
while the file is being transferred.
Note: If you are using FTTERM in
concurren t mode, do not perform any
print operations from the PC DOS
session while printing a host file.
You can return to the Transfer Status window from the
PC DOS session by entering the FTTERM key sequence
(default is Alt-FS).
4-31
Example of Receiving a Host File to the
PC Printer
RECEIVE PRN 'TSODSET.SCRIPT'/PWD (ASCII CRLF
This command prints TSO data set TSODSET.SCRIPT
that is protected by password PWD. The ASCII and CRLF
options are commonly used with text files.
Stopping a Printout
If you decide to stop the printout before it is complete,
follow these steps:
1. Return to the Transfer Status window (if you have
swi tched to another function) by pressing the
FTTERM key sequence (default is Alt-FS).
2. Press T to stop the printout. These messages appear in
sequence:
Waiting for host response to termination requeSL.
or
TerminaLion is complete.
to main menu.
Type any
~ey
to return
3. Press any key to return to the File Transfer Main
Menu.
Receiving a PC DOS File from a Host
Screen
This option lets you copy to a PC file the contents of a
display screen that was generated during a host session.
For example, you can use the FILELIST command and
store the resulting screen of filelist data as a document
file, or you can store a screen generated by a host
application for later inclusion in a document.
To receive a PC DOS file from a host screen, do the
following:
1. In the host session, display the screen that you want to
receive.
2. Switch to the File Transfer Main Menu using the
FTTERM key sequence (default is Alt-FS).
3. Display the Receive Command Format window
(Figure 4-5 on page 4-23) by entering a 2.
4. Type the RECEIVE command as described in the
Receive Command Format window. (FTTERM supplies
the RECEIVE part of the command.)
The format for receiving a PC file from a host screen
is:
RECEIVE [d:Jf\pathVfilename.ext HOSCREEN
[(ApPEND]
Note that APPEND is the only valid option for this
type of transfer. Using APPEND causes the screen
data to be added to the end of an existing file.
5. Press the Enter key to create the file. You cannot
switch to another function while the transfer is in
progress.
6. When the transfer is finished, press the host key
sequence (default is Alt-FIO) to return to the host
seSSIon.
Example of Receiving a PC DOS file from
a Host Screen
RECEIVE B:\SCREENS\HOST.TXT HOSCREEN
This command saves the host screen in PC file HOST.TXT
in path \SCREENS\ on drive B.
4-33
Receiving a Host Screen to the PC
Printer
This option lets you print on the PC printer the contents
of a display screen generated during a host session.
To receive a host screen to the PC printer, do the
following:
1. Be sure the printer is turned on, is online, and has a
supply of paper.
2. In the host session, display the screen that you want to
print.
3. Switch to the File Transfer Main Menu using the
FTTERM key sequence (default is Alt-FS).
4. Display the Receive Command Format window
(Figure 4-5 on page 4-23) by entering a 2.
5. Type the RECEIVE command as described in the
Receive Command Format window. (FTTERM supplies
.the RECEIVE part of the command.)
The format for printing a host screen is:
RECEIVE PRN HOSCREEN
6. Press the Enter key to start printing. You cannot
switch to another function while the transfer is in
progress.
7. When the transfer is finished, press the host key
sequence (default is Alt-FIO) to return to the host
seSSIon.
4-34
Using a Batch File to Transfer
Multiple Files
This section describes how to use a batch file to perform
multiple file transfers with a single FTTERM command.
You can store up to 20 SEND and RECEIVE commands in
a batch file for sequential processing. You can include
any combination of SEND and RECEIVE commands, in
any order. Keep in mind the following requirements:
•
Only protocol conversion transfers to the same SNA
host are permitted.
•
Only file-to-file transfer commands are permitted.
Transfer commands involving the screen or printer are
not permitted.
•
All of the PC files being sent must be available on the
diskettes being used by the PC when you start the
transfer. You cannot switch diskettes during the
batch file processing.
•
You must have space av~ilable for ali otHie files b-eing
sen t or received.
Creating the
Bat~h
File
You can use most text editing or word processing
programs to create the batch file. Follow these
guidelines:
•
Do not let a comn1and wrap around to the next line.
•
Keep each command on a single line (255 characters
maximum, including spaces).
•
End each line by pressing the Enter key.
You can use S or 1 instead of SEND, and you can use R
or 2 instead of RECEIVE.
4-35
Figure 4-7 shows how FTTERM commands in a batch file
can be formatted.
SEND CHAP1.DOC CHAPTERI SCRIPT Al (ASCII CRLF
RECEIVE CHAP2.DOC CHAPTER2 SCRIPT Al (ASCII CRLF
R B:CHAP3.DOC CHAPTER3 SCRIPT Al (ASCn CRLF
2 B:CHAP4.DOC CHAPTER4 SCRIPT Al (ASCII CRLF
S A:APPENDA.DOC APPENDA SCRIPT Al (ASCII CRLF'
1 A:APPENDB.DOC APPENDB SCRIPT Al (ASCII CRLF
SEND A:ADVENTUR.COM ADVENT BASIC Al
Figure
4-7.
Sample FTTERM Command Batch File
Processing the Batch File
After you create the batch file, you can tell FTTERM to
process it as follows:
1. Verify that the host is in the command ready state.
2. Switch to the File Transfer Main Menu (default is
Alt-F8).
3. Enter a 3. FTTERM prompts you for the name of the
batch file. (You can also enter BATCH or B instead
of 3. In addition, you can enter a complete command
as a single step by entering 3, BATCH, or B followed
by the name of the batch file.)
4. Enter the complete filename of the batch file,
including the drive letter, path, and extension, if
appropriate.
When FTTERM begins to process the batch file, it
displays the Status of Batch Transfer Requests screen
(Figure 4-8).
4-:36
Completed
Completed
Active
Waiting
Waiting
Waiting
Waiting
STATUS OF BATCH TRANSFER REQUESTS
A:CHAPtDOC
CHAPTER1 SCRIPT A1
A:CHAP2.DOC
CHAPTER2 SCRIPT A 1
A:CHAP3.DOC
CHAPTER3 SCRIPT A 1
A:CHAP4.DOC
CHAPTER4 SCRIPT A 1
A:APPENDA.DOC
APPENDA SCRIPT A1
A:APPENDB.DOC
APPENDB SCRIPT A 1
A:ADVENTUR.COM
ADVENT BASIC A 1
TYPE T to Terminate data transfer.
Alt-F7 = MSGS Alt-FS = FTTERM Alt-F9 = PC DOS
Figure
4-8.
The Status of Batch Transfer Requests Screen
Batch Transfer Status Messages
The following list defines the status messages that can
appear on the left side of the Status of Batch Transfer
Requests screen:
Active
The transfer is currently in progress.
Bad command
The command did not begin with SEND, RECEIVE,
S, R, 1, or 2, followed by a space.
Bad dest
You specified an invalid destination for the transfer.
PRN is not permitted.
Bad source
You specified an invalid source for the transfer.
HOSCREEN and PCSCREEN are not permitted.
Canceled
Either an unrecoverable file transfer error occurred,
or you interrupted the batch transfer by typing T at
the Status of Batch Transfer Requests screen.
4-37
Completed
The transfer was completed successfully.
Host error
The host file transfer program reported an error
during file transfer. FTTERM cancels this transfer
and begins processing the next command.
Press the key sequence for the Host Messages screen
(default is Alt-F7) to see a specific error message. See
Appendix A, "File Transfer Messages," for an
explanation and response.
Line drop
The link to the host was lost during the transfer.
FTTERM lists all subsequent requests in the batch file
as Canceled.
Re-establish the host session. You can either start the
complete batch transfer again or modify the batch file
to delete the commands that were successfully
processed.
Long name
The PC or host file specification exceeded the
maximum length of 78 characters. FTTERM skips
processing this command and begins processing the
next command.
Use a shorter name or path in the file specification
that is too long.
PC error
PC DOS reported an error during the file transfer.
FTTERM cancels this command and begins processing
the next command.
Enter the command by itself at the file transfer menu
to obtain a more detailed error message.
Waiting
The command is waiting to be processed by FTTERM.
4-38
Under some error conditions, you must terminate the
host file transfer program. You can do this by twice
pressing the PC key equivalent to PF2 in the host
session (default is F2). The host returns to the
command ready state.
Stopping the Batch File Processing
You can use the following procedure to stop the batch file
processing before it finishes:
1. Type a T at the batch transfer status display.
FTTERM asks whether you want to stop batch file
processing completely.
2. Do one of the following:
•
Enter a Y to stop the batch file processing
completely.
•
Enter an N to stop only the active transfer.
FTTERM begins the next transfer in the batch file.
Entering SEND and RECEIVE
Commands in the PC DOS Session
FTTERM, with its SEND.COM and RECEIVE.COM
programs, can accept a SEND or RECEIVE file transfer
command in the PC DOS session. This is useful when you
are using PC programs that can be configured to issue
DOS commands.
For example, you can configure such a program to
automatically send a PC file to a host when you finish
working on the PC file.
-i-39
With a fixed disk system, the command to send document
file MYFILE. TXT on drive A to the CMS A disk would be
as follows:
C:SEND MYFILE.TXT MYFILE SCRIPT (ASCII CRLF
Messages that report the status of the transfer appear in
the PC DOS session. For example:
TRANS02
Number of bytes transferred so far: ==> 2560
Keep in mind the following requirements when issuing a
SEND or RECEIVE command in the PC DOS session:
•
FTTERM must already be loaded in the normal
(resident) mode.
•
The configuration file that you are using must specify
the protocol conversion method for file transfers.
•
•
•
You cannot run another PC program while a file
· transfer is in progress.
You can interrupt the transfer by pressing the
. Ctrl-Break key sequence.
You cannot start a file transfer from the DOS prompt
while another transfer is being processed through the
file transfer menu.
Host Considerations
This section includes the following information about
specific SNA hosts:
•
•
•
Verifying that the host system is ready to perform file
transfers
Interpreting the general command formats
Using the command options.
-1-40
VM/CMS Hosts
This section provides information about VM/CMS hosts.
Preparing for File Transfer
Follow these steps to prepare the VM/CMS host for file
transfer:
1. After you log on to the VM/CMS host or exit from a
host program, make sure that the CMS ready message
is the last thing on the screen:
R; (other data)
Note: It is not necessary to exit
from a host program to print the
host screen or save it in a PC file.
If the screen is blank, press the Enter key until
RUNNING appears in the lower right corner:
RUNNING
If HOLDING appears instead of RUNNING, press the
PC equivalent to the CLEAR key (default is Home)
until RUNNING appears.
2. Press the key sequence for the File Transfer :rvlain
Menu (default is Alt-FS).
The VMjCMS host is now ready for file transfers.
-1:-41
Command Formats
The file transfer command formats for VM/CMS hosts are:
•
File-to-file transfers:
SEND [d:]f\pathVfilename.ext fn ft fm (options
RECEIVE [d:]f\pathVfilename.ext fn ft fm (options
•
Screen-to-file transfers:
SEND HOSCREEN fn ft fm [(APPEND]
SEND PCSCREEN fn ft fm [(APPEND]
RECEIVE [d:]f\pathVfilename.ext PCSCREEN
[(APPEND]
RECEIVE [d:]f\pathVfilename.ext HOSCREEN
[(APPEND]
•
File-to-printer transfers:
SEND [d:]f\pathVfilename.ext PRN·
RECEIVE PRN fn ft fm (options
•
Screen-to-printer transfers:
SEND PCSCREEN PRN
RECEIVE PRN HOSCREEN
The follo\ving list describes the user-specified parts of the
command formats:
d:
4-42
The PC disk or diskette drive letter, specified
when the PC file is on a drive other than the
default drive (the one with FTTERM).
The path, specified when the PC file is in a
directory other than the current directory (used
mainly with fixed disks).
\path\
filename The PC filename. This item is required .
.ext
The optional PC file extension, such as .DOC
and .EXE.
fn
The CMS filename (8 characters maximum).
ft
The eMS filetype (8 characters maximum).
fm
The CMS filemode (2 characters maximum,
default is at).
options
See "SEND and RECEIVE Command Options"
on page 4-48.
Note: Examples of file transfer
commands for VMjCMS hosts appear on
pages 4-13, 4-19, and 4-27.
MVS/TSO Hosts
This section provides information about MVSjTSO hosts.
Preparing for File Transfer
Follow these steps to prepare the MVSjTSO host for file
transfer:
1. After you log on to the MVSjTSO host or exit from a
host program, make sure that the TSO ready message
is the last thing on the screen:
READY
-1-43
Note: You cannot create a new
member in a partitioned data set
that is currently being used by
someone else.
2. Press the key sequence for the File Transfer Main
Menu (default is Alt-FS).
The MVS/TSO host is now ready for file transfers.
Command Formats
The file transfer command formats for MVS/TSO hosts
are:
•
File-to-file transfers:
SEND d:\path\filename.ext
'data.set.name[(rnember.name)] 'f/passwordJ (options
RECEIVE d:\path\filename.ext
'data.set.name[(member.name)] 'f/passwordJ (options
•
Screen-to-file transfers:
SEND HOSCREEN ·'data.set.name[(member.name)] ,
f/password] [(APPEND]
SEND PCSCREEN 'data.set.name[(member.name)] ,
[/password] [(APPEND]
RECEIVE [d:][\pathVfilename.ext PCSCREEN
[(APPEND]
RECEIVE [d:]{\pathVfilename.ext HOSCREEN
[(APPEND]
•
File-to-printer transfers:
SEND [d:J{\pathVfilename.ext PRN
RECEIVE PRN 'data.set.name[(mcmber.name)] ,
f/password (options
-1--14
•
Screen-to-printer transfers:
SEND PCSCREEN PRN
RECEIVE PRN HOSCREEN
The following list defines the user-specified parts of the
command formats:
d:
The PC disk or diskette drive letter,
specified when the PC file is on a drive
other than the default drive (the one
wi th FTTER~I).
\path\
The path, specified when the PC file is in
a directory other than the current
directory (used mainly with fixed disks).
filename
The PC filename. This item is required .
.ext
The optional PC file extension, such as
.DOC and .EXE.
data.set.name
The TSO data set name, consisting of up
to 44 characters. The single quotes may
not be required at a specific TSO
installation.
(member.name)
The TSO member name, enclosed in
paren theses, which is valid for
partitioned data sets only.
/password
The optional password. Do not use a
space before the slash.
options
See "SEND and RECEIVE Command
Options" on page 4-48.
Note: Exalnples of file transfer
commands for lYIVS/TSO hosts appear
on pages 4-13, 4-27, and 4-32.
-1-45
CICS and IWS Hosts
This section provides information about CICS and IWS
hosts. It is not a complete reference for file transfers with
IWS hosts. For complete information about the use of
command options with IWS hosts, refer to the VSE/SP
documentation listed under "Related Manuals" on
page viii.
Preparing for File Transfer
After you log on to the CICS or IWS host or finish with a
host transaction, clear the screen by pressing the PC
equivalent to the CLEAR key (default is Home). The
CICS or IWS host is now ready for file transfers.
Command Formats
The file transfer command formats for CICS and IWS
hosts are:
•
File-to-file transfers:
SEND [d:}f\pathVfilename.ext fn (options) [comments}
RECEIVE [d:}f\pathVfilename.ext fn (options
•
Screen-to-file transfers:
SEND HOSCREEN fn (options
SEND PCSCREEN fn (options
RECEIVE [d:}f\pathVfilename.ext PCSCREEN
RECEIVE [d:}[\pathVfilename.ext HOSCREEN
•
File-to-printer transfers:
SEND [d:}f\pathVfilcname.ext PRN
4-46
RECEIVE PRN fn (options
•
Screen-to-printer transfers:
SEND PCSCREEN PRN
RECEIVE PRN HOSCREEN
The following list defines the user-specified parts of the
command formats:
d:
The PC disk or diskette drive letter, specified
when the PC file is on a drive other than the
default drive (the one with FTTERM).
\path\
The path, specified when the PC file is in a
directory other than the current directory
(used mainly with fixed disks).
filename
The PC filename. This item is required.
.ext
The optional PC file extension, such as .DOC
and .EXE.
fn
The name of the CICS file (8 characters _ _
maximum; the first character must be a letter.
IWS only: When receiving a file to the PC
from the host temporary storage queue, you
can substitute an asterisk (*) for the host file
name. This allows FTTERM to receive the
file regardless of the contents of the file
header record. Note, however, that the
header record is discarded during the
transfer.
options
See "SEND and RECEIVE Command
Options" on page 4-48.
comments
Any optional comments or control
information; valid when sending to temporary
storage queue only. If you do not specify any
options, you must still enter both parentheses
before entering comments.
4-47
Note: Examples of file transfer
commands for CICS hosts appear on
pages 4-14, 4-21, and 4-28.
Examples of file transfer commands for
IWS hosts appear on pages 4-14 and 4-28.
SEND and RECEIVE Command
Options
This section defines the options available for FTTERM
file transfers using the protocol conversion method. The
basic options are described first, followed by a complete
list of all options.
Basic Options for VM/CMS and
MVS/TSO Hosts
The basic options for SEND and RECEIVE commands
when transferring alphanumeric files with VM/CMS and
MVS/TSO hosts are:
•
•
•
ASCII
CRLF
LRECL.
ASCII and CRLF are usually used together, in either
order.
The LRECL option is more specialized than ASCII and
CRLF. It lets you specify a logical length for host records
when a PC file contains lines that are longer than 80
characters. Doing so prevents a single PC file line from
being segmented into multiple host records on a SEND
command. The value you specify should be equal to or
greater than the length of the longest line in the PC file.
4-48
For binary files, it is common to specify no options.
FTTERM assumes that you are transferring binary data
when you do not specify any options.
Figure 4-9 lists the basic options for VMjCMS and
MVSjTSO hosts. The "Resulting Data Type and Format"
column describes what happens to the file data during the
transfer.
Resulting Data
Type and Format
Options
Filetype
ASCII CRLF
Alphanumeric
(text) files
Converted
between ASCII
and EBCDIC.
Each line in the
PC file (ending in
CR-LF) equals
one host logical
record.
none
Binary files
No conversion.
The PC file is
segmented into
fixed length host
logical records.
ASCII
Special
Converted
between
and EBCDIC. The
PC file is
segmented into
fixed length host
logical records.
CRLF
Special
No conversion.
Each line in the
PC file (ending in
CR-LF) equals
one host logical
record.
Figure
4-9.
Asci,-
Basic Options for VM/CMS and MVS/TSO Hosts
See Figure 4-3 on page 4-10 and Figure 4-6 on page 4-25
for complete tables of available options for SEND and
RECEIVE commands. See "Option Definitions" on
page 4-51 for a definition of each option.
4-49
Basic Options for CICS and IWS
Hosts
When transferring alphanumeric files with crcs and IWS
hosts, it is common to specify no options on the SEND or
RECEIVE command. FTTERM assumes that you are
transferring alphanumeric data when you do not specify
any options.
The basic option to use when transferring binary files is
either of the following (they are equivalent):
•
•
BINARY
NOCRLF.
Figure 4-10 lists the most common options for CICS and
IWS hosts. The "Resulting Data Type and Format"
column describes what happens to the file data during the
transfer.
Resulting Data
Type and Format
Options
Filetype
none
Alphanumeric
(text) files
Converted
between ASCII
and EBCDIC.
Each line in the
PC file (ending in
CR-LF) equals
one host logical
record.
BINARY
Binary files
No conversion.
The PC file is
segmented into
fixed length host
logical records.
ASCII
Same as none
CRLF
Same as none
Figure
4-50
4-10 (Part 1 of 2).
Basic Options for CICS and I\VS
Hosts
Resulting Data
Type and Format
Options
Filetype
ASCII CRLF
Same as none
NOCRLF
Same as BINARY
BINARY
NOCRLF
Same as BINARY
BINARY
NOCRLF
Same as BINARY
ASCII
NOCRLF
Special
Converted
between ASCII
and EBCDIC. The
PC file is
segmented into
fixed length host
logical records.
BINARY CRLF
Special
No conversion.
Each line in the
PC file (ending in
CR-LF) equals
one host logical
record.
Figure
4-10 (Part 2 of 2).
Basic Options for CICS and IWS
Hosts
See Figure 4-3 on page 4-10 and Figure 4-6 on page 4-25
for complete tables of available options for SEND and
RECEIVE commands. See "Option Definitions" for a
definition of each option.
Option Definitions
This section defines each of the command options
available for SEND and RECEIVE commands. They are
arranged alphabetically.
APPEND
Commonly used.
This option causes FTTERM to attach the file being
transferred to the end of an existing destination file.
4-51
If the destination file does not exist, it will be created. If
you do not specify the APPEND option, the destination
file will be replaced.
CICS and IWS users only: APPEND is not available as a
SEND command option. For IWS, see NOREPLACE.
When appending binary files with a RECEIVE command,
use the BINARY option. Do not use the NOCRLF option.
ASCII
Commonly used.
This option specifies that the file data is alphanumeric
(displayable) data, such as documents and source code.
The data is converted from ASCII to EBCDIC characters
on a SEND command and from EBCDIC to ASCII
characters on a RECEIVE command. The ASCII option is
commonly used in combination with the CRLF option.
CICS and IWS users only: ASCII is a default option.
U sing ASCII implies that you want the CRLF option,
unless you also specify the NOGRLF option.
BINARY
Commonly used; for Cles and IWS only.
This option specifies that the file data is binary, such as
encrypted data, compiled programs, or other data that
cannot be displayed and read online. The data is not
converted during the transfer.
The BINARY option is valid for CICS and IWS only.
Binary data is assumed by other hosts when you do not
specify the ASCII option. Using the BINARY option
implies that you want the NOCRLF option, unless you
also specify the CRLF option.
BLANK
Commonly used; for RECEIVE on IWS only.
This option prevents the host file transfer program from·
deleting trailing blanks before carriage return/line feed
characters. Deleting the trailing blanks is the default.
The BLANK option is valid for alphanumeric files only.
BLKSIZE(n)
Not commonly used; for SEND on MVS/TSO only.
This option determines the block size for a new sequential
data set on the TSO volume. If you omit this option when
creating a new data set, its block size will equal its record
length.
CRLF
Commonly used.
This option is commonly used in combination with the
ASCII option for alphanumeric files. It has the following
results:
•
SEND command. CRLF causes carriage return/line
feed characters to be regarded as the ends of logical
records at the host. The carriage return/line feed
characters are not written into the host file.
•
RECEIVE command. CRLF causes carriage
return/line feed characters to be inserted at the ends of
logical records. Trailing blanks are removed from the
records unless you use the BLANK option (IWS only).
CICS and IWS users only: CRLF is a default option.
Using CRLF implies that you want the ASCII option,
unless you also specify the BINARY option.
-1-53
DELETE
Default option; for RECEIVE on IWS only.
When you receive a file from your own userID, the host
file is deleted by default (thus DELETE is a default
option). If you do not want the host file to be deleted, use
the KEEP option. Files that other users have shared with
you using the PUBLIC or FOR option are not deleted
when you receive them.
FILE
Commonly used; for IWS only.
Available options are:
•
FILE = HTF
The file is to be transferred to or from
the CICS Host Transfer File. This is the default
option.
•
FILE = TS
The file is to be transferred to or from
the CICS temporary storage queue.
FOR
For SEND on IWS only.
This option lets you share a file with up to eight users,
specified in this format:
FOR = usidl, ... usid8
The usidn represents the userID by which a user is
currently logged on to CICS. It can be up to 8 characters
and must be separated from a preceding usidn by commas
with no embedded blanks.
If you want to share the file with more than eight users,
you can use the SHARE function of the DOS/VSE Move
Utilities.
4-54
In the host session, CICS notifies the specified users that
a file has been stored for them in the Host Transfer File.
The FOR option, together with the PUBLIC option, makes
a file available to all users, with notification to selected
users.
You can update the shared file by performing another
SEND command for the same file using the REPLACE
option. The FOR option need not be used again. The
previously specified users will be notified of the arrival of
the updated file.
FROM
For RECEIVE on IWS only.
This option lets you receive a file that was sent either as
a public file or as a shared file using the FOR option.
You specify the owner of the file in this format:
FROM=usid
The usid represents the CICS userID of the owner of the
file. When you receive the file using the FROM option,
the file owner receives notification of the transfer in his
host session.
You can use the DISPL. .~ Y function of the DOSjVSE
Move Utilities to see whether there are any shared or
public files available to you.
KEEP
For RECEIVE on I\tVS only.
This option prevents the host file transfer program from
deleting a file you are receiving from your own userID.
See the DELETE option.
-1-55
LRECL
Not commonly used;
for SEND on VM/GMS and MVS/TSO only.
This option lets you specify either:
•
•
A maximum length for variable-length records
A length other than 80 characters for fixed-length
records .
.(See the RECFM option.) If you send a record that is
longer than the specified length, the host file transfer
program segments it into multiple records.
The formats for the logical record length options are:
•
VM/CMS:
LRECL n
where n can be from 1 to 256.
•
MVS/TSO:
LRECL(n)
where n can be from 1 to 132. LRECL is not valid for
MVS/TSO partitioned data sets.
NOCRLF
Not commonly used; for GIGS and IWS only.
This option overrides the automatic conversion of
carriage return/line feed characters in the PC file to
logical record boundaries in the CICS Host Transfer File
or the temporary storage queue. The file is regarded as a
single continuous record. (See the CRLF option.)
Using the NOCRLF option implies that you want the
BINARY option unless you also specify the ASCII option.
-l-i)6
NOREPLACE
Default option, for SEND on IWS only.
If a host queue or file already exists with the same name
as the file being sent, this option causes a message to be
sent to the host session, and the transfer is canceled.
Note that NOREPLACE is a default option. (See the
REPLACE option.)
PRIVATE
Default option; for SEND on IWS only.
This option indicates that the file being sent to the Host
Transfer File can only be accessed by the sender. (See the
PUBLI C option.)
PROGRAM
For SEND on IWS only;
command must include FILE = TS.
This option does the following:
•
SEND command. PROGHAM specifies ~ __ CJCS user
program to be activated after the PC file has been stored in the temporary storage queue.
•
RECEIVE command. PROGRAM specifies a CICS
user program to load in to the temporary storage queue
before the RECEIVE operation is started.
You specify the user program name in this format:
PROGRAM = CFTRname
The name can be froln 2 to 4 characters long. It must not
contain the character $.
-i-57
PUBLIC
For SEND on IWS only.
This option indicates that the file being sent to the Host
Transfer File is to be available to everyone on the system.
(See the PRIVATE option.)
QNAME
For SEND on IWS only;
command must include FILE = TS.
This option does the following:
•
SEND command. QNAME specifies the CICS
temporary storage queue that will contain the PC file
being sent.
•
RECEIVE command. QNAME specifies the temporary
storage queue that contains the host data to be
received.
You specify the queue name in this format:
QNAME = CFTRname
The name can be from 2 to 4 characters long. It must not
contain the character $.
A queue name can also be supplied by a user program
named in a PROGRAM option.
If you do not use this option, the host file transfer
program uses a default queue name in which name is the
terminal ID. For example, if the terminal ID is D080, the
default queue nalne is CFTRD080 .
.1-58
RECFM
Not commonly used;
for SEND on VM/CMS and MVS/TSO only.
The available record format options are:
•
VM/CMS:
MVS/TSO:
RECFM F
RECFM(F)
The host file will contain fixed length records. The
length is set to 80 bytes by default, but you can set
another record length with the LRECL option. This is
the default record format for MVS/TSO.
•
VM/CMS:
MVS/TSO:
RECFM V
RECFM(V)
The host file will contain variable length records.
Host record boundaries are set to coincide with
carriage return/line feed characters in the PC file
(valid only when the CRLF option is used). This is the
default record format for VM/CMS.
•
MVS/TSO:
RECFM(U)
The record format is undefined. The host data set will
contain one continuous record. This option is valid
for MVS/TSO only.
-i-59
REPLACE
Commonly used; for IWS only.
This option does the following:
•
SEND command. REPLACE causes the PC file being
sent to replace an existing host queue or file that has
the same name. (See the NOREPLACE option.)
•
RECEIVE command. REPLACE causes the host file
or queue being received to replace an existing PC file
that has the same name. REPLACE is a default option
for RECEIVE commands on IWS. (See the APPEND
option.)
SPACE
Not commonly used; for SEND on MVS/TSO only.
Allocates space for a new sequential data set on the TSO
volume. You specify the space parameters in this format:
SP ACE(nl ,n2) units
The nl represents the number of units of space to be
allocated. You also can specify a value for n2;which is
an extra allocation if the data set exceeds the space
allowed by nl.
The units can be one of the following:
•
•
•
TRACKS
CYLINDERS
A VBLOCKS(value).
If you omit the SPACE option, TSO allocates one block.
The size of the block is deternlined by the BLI{SIZE or
LRECL option.
4-60
-
TYPE
For IWS only.
This option supports the VSEjSP Document Management
package. It lets users identify files sent from the 'PC as
either EDIT or PRINT files. It is valid for transfers to the
Host Transfer File only (as opposed to transfers to the
temporary storage queue).
The filetype is kept as internal information in the
directory entry of the Host Transfer File; it is not
displayed on the DOSjVSE Move Utilities filelist. There
cannot be an EDIT file and a PRINT file with the same
file name.
Available options are:
TYPE=EDIT
TYPE = PRINT
4-61
4-62
Chapter 5. Transferring Files
Using the Native Emulation
Method
About this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Native Emulation Transfer Works ........
Before Starting a File Transfer ..............
Selecting a Terminal Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Full-Screen Host Programs ..........
The File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Host Data at the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the Save Operation ............
Examples of Saving Host Data at the PC ...
Transmitting a PC File to a Host ............
Stopping the Transmit Operation .........
Example of Transmitting a PC File to a Host
Copying a Host Screen to a PC File or Printer .
Stopping the Copy Operation .... -. ~:- . _.. ... ..
Examples of Copying Host Screen Data ....
Using FILECONV When Transferring Binary
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying ASCII and Binary Files .......
Starting FILECONV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting Binary Files to ASCII .........
Converting ASCII Files to Binary .........
Exiting From FILECONV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILECONV Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-7
5-10
5-11
5-11
5-13
5-14
5-14
-5-15
5-16
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-1
Notes:
5-:2
About this Chapter
This chapter explains how to transfer files using the
native emulation method. This is the file transfer method
you use with all ASCII hosts.
You can also use the native emulation method with SNA
hosts. (The protocol conversion method is preferred for
SNA hosts that have the appropriate program listed under
"Required Software" on page 1-14. See
Chapter 4, "Transferring Files Using the Protocol
Conversion Method," for more information.)
For you to transmit PC files to the host, the host must
have a line-oriented data entry program, such as a text
editor. Consult the host system administrator or the host
documentation for the program to use.
This chapter also explains how to use the FILECONV
program to prepare binary files for file transfer using
native emulation.
How Native Emulation Transfer
Works
To transmit a file to a host using native emulation, you
start a host data entry or text editor program, switch to
FTTERM, and start the file transfer. FTTER~1 sends the
data as if you were typing it on the keyboard.
When the file transfer is finished, you close the host file
using the normal procedures for the host program.
Saving a file from the host is a similar process. The host
sends text to the PC display,but FTTERM intercepls the
data and sends it to a PC file or printer as well.
5-3
Before Starting a File Transfer
Before you start a file transfer, be sure that:
•
You made and configured a working copy of FTTERM
as described in Chapter 2, "Preparing to Use
FTTERM."
•
You started FTTERM and established a host session as
described in Chapter 3, "Using FTTERM."
•
If receiving a file, you have enough disk space at the
PC to contain the file~
•
If sending a file, you have enough space allocated to
you at the host to contain the file.
Selecting a Terminal Type
Some ASCII hosts ask you to select a terminal type from a
list when you log on. Select IBM 3101 if it is in the list.
If IBM 3101 is not in the list, consult the host
documentation or system administrator to determine" the
correct terminal type.
U sing Full-Screen Host Programs
If you save the data displayed during a host session while
using a full-screen host program rather than a
line-oriented program, the resulting PC file may be partly
or completely unusable.
You can determine whether a host program is full-screen
by the cursor movement. With a full-screen program, the
cursor can move directly to different locations on the
screen. With other programs, the cursor always starts in
the upper left corner and moves down, or it stays on the
bottom line while text scrolls upward.
5-4
There are two ways to avoid problems while using a
full-screen host program:
•
If the host offers a list of terminals, do not select IBM
3101. Select a terminal that does not support
full-screen operation. Consult the host documentation
or system administrator, if necessary.
•
Use the COpy command (selection 3 on the File
Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation) to save
individual screens. See "Copying a Host Screen to a
PC File or Printer" on page 5-14.
The File Transfer Main Menu
Native Emulation
The File Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation
(Figure 5-1) is the starting point for all PC/host file
transfers using native emulation.
5-5
FILE TRANSFER MAIN MENU- NATIVE EMULATION
MODE: CONCURRENT
10
Command
Description
1
2
3
4
S
SAVE
TRANSMIT
COPY
LOAD
MODE
Receive data to PC
Send data from PC
Copy host screen to file or printer
Load a configuration file
Toggle nonconcurrent and concurrent
Type an 10 number or Command and press ENTER.
===>
Alt-F1 = HELP Alt-F2 = RETURN
Alt-F4 = RETRIEVE Alt-FS = COLOR
Alt-F6=DISC
Alt-F8=FTTERM Alt-F9=PC DOS
Alt-F10=HOST
Figure
5-1.
The File Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation
The following sections cover only the file transfer
commands SAVE, TRANSMIT, and COPY.
See Appendix B, "FTTERM Menus," for a description of
each item on the File Transfer Main Menu.
See Chapter 3, "Using FTTERM," for instructions on
accessing the File Transfer Main Menu and switching
between FTTERM functions.
For specific information on the LOAD and MODE
commands, see:
•
"Loading a Configuration File" on page 3-18
•
"Selecting Concurrent or Nonconcurrent Mode" on
page 3-17.
(
Saving Host Data at the PC
This section describes how to save a host file or the data
displayed during an interactive host session (including the
keystrokes). You can save the host data at these
destina tions:
•
•
PC file
PC printer.
To save a single screen of data from the host session, see
"Copying a Host Screen to a PC File or Printer" on
page 5-14.
Notes:
1. When you are saving host data in a PC file, you must
stop the save operation when you are finished. If you
reset or turn off the PC before stopping the save
operation, FTTERM does not create the PC file. None
of the received data is saved. To stop the save
operation, see "Stopping the Save Operation" on
page 5-10.
2. In unusual situations, you may encounter a host that
does not support XONjXOFF pacing (using the ASCII
characters DCl and DC3) during d~ta transfers. The
host documentation or system administrator should
provide this information. With hosts that do not
support XONjXOFF pacing, be aware of these
limitations to the line speed in the configuration file:
•
When saving host data at a printer, the data must
not be received faster than the printer can print it.
As a rule, the line speed should not exceed 10 times
the printer's speed in characters per second. Your
own experience may reveal that you can use higher
line speeds without losing data.
:)-1
•
When saving a large host file in a PC file, the line
speed should not exceed 1200 baud. Again, your
own experience may reveal that you can use higher
line speeds without losing data.
Follow these steps to save host data at the PC:
1. Start a session with the host as described in
Chapter 3, "Using FTTERM."
2. Switch to the File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation by entering the FTTERM key sequence
(default is Alt-F8).
3. Enter 1 for the SAVE command. (You can also enter S
or SAVE. In addition, if you are familiar with the
format of the SAVE command, you can enter the whole
command as a single step.)
FTTERM displays:
FORMAT:
[d:] [\path\]filename[.ext]
Type filename or PRN for printer and press ENTER
5-8
4. Do one of the following:
•
Type the complete specification for the PC file in
which you want to save the host data. You can
specify a new file or an existing file. Include the
drive letter, path, and extension, if appropriate.
If you specify the name of an existing PC file,
FTTERM displays:
The file already exiscs.
Do you wish to Append, Cancel,
or Replace (A, C, or rt)?
Do one of the following:
Enter A to attach the data to the end of the
existing file.
Enter C to cancel the SAVE command. This
lets you use a different filename or disk drive.
Enter R to replace the existing file with a new
file.
•
Type PRN to print the host data. -Be--sure that theprinter is turNed on, is online, and has a supply of
paper.
5. Press the Enter key. FTTERM displays:
Text is being saved.
Type 'E' to seep sav~~g
~ext
and close file.
6. Return to the host session (default key sequence is
Alt-FIO).
5-9
7. Do one of the following:
•
Save a host file by entering the command that
displays a host file on the screen. Everything that
appears on the PC screen after you return to the
host session is saved in a file or printed.
If the display output is continuous, you can switch
to the PC DOS session and run PC programs during
the transfer (concurrent mode only). If the display
output waits for you to press a certain key between
screens of data, you may prefer to stay in the host
session during the transfer.
•
Save an interactive host session by proceeding with
the host session in the normal manner. Everything
that appears on the PC screen after you return to
the host session is saved in a file or printed.
When you save host data in a PC file, the disk drive
may not start writing the data immediately. FTTERlVI
waits until a buffer fills up before writing the data on
the disk.
Stopping the Save Operation
You can stop the save operation and close the PC file at
any time during or after the data transfer by following
these steps:
1.
Return to the File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation by pressing the FTTERM key sequence
(default is Alt-FS).
2. Type E. FTTERl\1 displays:
*** Saving Text ended ***
You can now return to the host or PC DOS session.
5-10
You can stop and restart the save operation any number
of times during a single host session. To restart the save
operation, return to step 2 under "Saving Host Data at the
PC" on page 5-7.
Examples of Saving Host Data at the
PC
SAVE C:SESSION.HST
This command saves the host session in file
SESSION.HST on drive C.
SAVE PRN
This command prints the host session.
Transmitting a PC File to a Host
This section describes how to transmit a PC file to a host
using the native emulation method.
Note: This procedure works for
alphanumeric files only. You must
convert binary files such as COM or
EXE files to a temporary alphanumeric
format before transmitting them to the
host. See "Using FILECONV When
Transferring Binary Files" on page 5-16
for instructions.
:1-11
Follow these steps to transmit a PC file to a host:
1. In the host session, start the data entry or text
processing program that you normally use for entering
keyboard data into a host file. Place the program into
its input state. (You can also open an existing host
file and insert or append the PC file. Be sure the host
program is in the appropriate state.)
2. Return to the File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation by pressing the FTTERM key sequence
(default is Alt-FS).
3. Enter 2 for the TRANSMIT command. (Y ou can also
enter T or TRANSMIT. In addition, if you are
familiar with the format of the TRANSMIT command,
you can enter the whole command as a single step.)
FTTERM displays:
FORMAT:
[d:l
[\path\]fi~ename[.ex~]
Type filename and press ENTER
4. Type the complete specification for the PC file that
you want to transmit to the host; Include- the drive
letter, path, and extension, if appropriate.
5. Press the Enter key. FTTERM displays:
***
***
Bytes transmitted: ~nnn of
Type T to terminate
~nnn
***
***
FTTERM does not let you switch to the host session
during the transfer. You can, however, switch to the
PC DOS session (default is Alt-F9).
When the transmit operation is finished, FTTERM
displays this message on the File Transfer Main Menu
- Native Emulation:
***
File transfer complete ***
You can now return to the host session (default is
Alt-FI0) and edit or close the new host file.
Stopping the Transmit Operation
You can stop the transmit operation at any time during
the file transfer by following these steps:
1. Return to the File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation (if you have switched to another function)
using the FTTERM key sequence (default is ~lt-F8).
2. Type T. FTTERM displays:
*** File transmit canceled ***
3. Return to the host session (default is Alt-FI0) to close
or abandon the new host file. The host file contains
any text that was sent before you stopp-ed the transmit
operation.
5-13
Example of Transmitting a PC File to
a Host
TRANSMIT \123\PROPOSAL. WKS
This command transmits PC file PROPOSAL.WKS in path
\123\ on the current drive.
Copying a Host Screen to a PC
File or Printer
This section describes the steps for saving a single screen
. of data displayed during a host session. You can save the
host screen at these destinations:
•
•
PC file
PC printer.
To save more than a single screen of data from the host
session, see "Saving Host Data at the PC" on page 5-7.
Follow these steps to copy a host screen to a PC file or
the PC printer:
1. In the host session, display the screen of text that you
want to copy. Use the host program's Pause-Display
command if necessary. (Ctrl-S is common when
XON/XOFF is supported.)
2. Switch to the File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation (default is Alt-FS).
3. Enter 3 to select the COpy command. FTTERM
displays:
~·"2R:-'1:;r:
;d.:
1 [\pach\] filc:nCllne[ .ext]
4. Do one of the following:
•
Type the complete specification for the PC file to
which you want the host screen to be copied.
Include the drive letter, path, and extension, if
appropriate.
•
Type PRN to print the host screen. Be sure your
printer is turned on, is online, and has a supply of ,
paper. You cannot switch to another session while
the printing is in progress.
5. Press the Enter key. FTTERM displays:
***
Copying screen.
Type 'T' to terminate
***
When the copy is finished, FTTERM displays this
message on the File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation:
***
Copy screen comple:e
***
Stopping the Copy Operation
You can stop the copy operation at any time by typing T.
FTTERM displays:
*** Copy screen canceled ***
This is particularly useful if the printer has a problem
while printing the host screen data.
5-15
Examples of Copying Host Screen
Data
COpy SCREEN.HST
This command saves the host screen data in PC file
SCREEN.HST on the current drive.
COpy PRN
This command prints the host screen data.
Using FILECONV When
Transferring Binary Files
This section describes how to prepare binary files for
transmission to a host using the native emulation method.
With native emulation, FTTERM transmits PC files as if
you were typing characters on the keyboard. Therefore,
the file must consist of ASCII (alphanumeric) data~"
Binary files such as COlVI and EXE files do not consist of
ASCII data.
You must use FTTERM's FILECONV program to convert
binary files to an ASCII format before you can transmit
the file using native emulation. (This does not apply to
sending files using protocol conversion. It does apply,
however, to sending files to SNA hosts using native
emulation.) FILECONV creates a separate ASCII file; the
original binary file is not affected.
When you or another FTTERM user saves the file back to
a PC, you must use FILECONV a second time to convert
it to its original binary format. The ASCII version of the
file is meaningful only to FILECONV.
5-16
Identifying
A~\.;l.l i:l~.I.'---
___
The FILECONV program recognizes the following types c
files as binary files:
•
Files that have been assembled or compiled. Files wi'
the extension COM or EXE are in this category.
•
BASIC program files that are stored in "protected"
format.
•
Text files that contain graphics or special character
null records, or records whose length is greater thaI
the host can accept.
Many text files produced by PC word processing progr
contain special characters, thus qualifying them as bir
files. This is a problem if you want to edit the text fil
the host or insert it into another host file. If you pro(
the file with FILECONV, all you can do is store it at '
host; you cannot edit or display it. There are several
things to try in this case:
1. Transmit the file without converting it and see w
happens. You can often see special characters in
host file and erase them with the host text editor
2. If the results are not satisfactory, use the PC WQ
processing program to convert all soft carriage I
(wrap lines) to hard carriage returns. It may al~
to delete formatting commands like bold print a
underlining.
3. If the preceding suggestions do not solve the pI
obtain a PC file conversion program that inser
carriage return/line feed characters at the end
line of text. You should be able to transmit tr
after converting it with this type of program.
a software dealer.
Starting FILECONV
Note: Diskette users please note that
the FILECONV program file is not on
the FTTERM working diskette. It is on
the FILECONV working diskette you
created in the procedures under
"Making a Working Copy of FTTERM"
on page 2-4.
To run FILECONV,' follow these steps:
1. Load DOS or exit from a PC application program in
the normal way. The A> or C> prompt appears.
2. Diskette systems only. Insert the FILECONV working
diskette in drive A. Insert the diskette with the file to
be converted in drive B.
3. Enter:
FILECONV
The FILECONV Function Selection Menu (Figure 5-2)
appears.
IBM Personal Computer
IBM 3101 Emulation Program
Version 1.00 (c) Copyright
IBM Corp. 1982
Program Name: File Conversion
Choose:
1
2
3
Binary to ASCII
ASCII to binary
Exit program
Type a number
Figure
5-2.
The FILECONV Function Selection Menu
Converting Binary Files to ASCII
Follow these steps to create an ASCII version ofa binary
file that you can transmit to a host:
Note: The ASCII file that FILECONV
creates may be larger than the original
binary file. On average, the ASCII file
requires one and a half times the disk
space taken by the binary file.
1. Access the FILECONV menu as described under
"Starting FILECONV" on page 5-18.
2. Enter 1. FILECONV displays:
Enter binary filename
3. Type the complete specification for the binary file,
including the drive letter, path, and extension, if
appropriate. Press the Enter key. FILECONV
displays:
Enter ASCII filename
4. Type the complete specification for the ASCII file,
including the drive letter, path, and extension, if
appropriate. It must be different from the binary file.
You can use the extension ASC to identify converted
files. Press the Enter key.
FILECONV reads the first file and writes the
converted version into the second file, leaving the
original file unchanged. When finished, FILECONV
displays:
File conversion cODplecc.
You can now use the TRANS:NIIT selection froln the File
Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation to send the
ASCII file to a host.
;)-19
When you or another FTTERM user saves the ASCII file
back to a PC, you must use FILECONV again to convert
the ASCII file to binary format. The next section
describes this procedure.
If an error message appears while you are using
FILECONV, see "FILECONV Messages" on page 5-21 for
an explanation and recommended response.
Converting ASCII Files to Binary
This procedure only applies to ASCII files that were
created by FILECONV.
Follow these steps after you use the SAVE command to
receive an ASCII file that was created by FILECONV.
This procedure creates a binary file that is a duplicate of
the original binary file. The ASCII file is not affected.
1. Access the FILECONV menu as described in "Starting
FILECONV" on page 5-18.
2. Enter 2. FILECONV displays:
Enter ASCII filename
3. Type the complete specification for the ASCII file,
including the drive letter, path, and extension, if
appropriate. Press the Enter key. FILECONV
displays:
Enter binary filename
4. Type the complete specification for the binary file,
including the drive letter, path, and extension, if
appropriate. It must be different from the ASCII file.
Press the Enter key.
5-20
FILECONV reads the first file and writes the
converted version into the second file, leaving the
original file unchanged. When finished, FILE CO NV
displays:
File conversion complete.
If an error message appears while you are using
FILECONV, see "FILECONV Messages" for an
explanation and recommended response.
Exiting From FILECONV
When you are finished using the FILECONV program,
enter 3 on the FILECONV menu. The DOS system prompt
appears.
FILECONV Messages
The following list contains the messages that can appear
when you are running FILECONV. Each message
includes an explanation and recommended response.
Cannot read the file filename
The FILECONV program encountered an error when
reading the specified file. The file or disk may be
damaged.
Check the condition of the file. If necessary, try the
conversion again with a backup copy of the file.
Cannot use filename for both input and output
You have specified the same filename for both the
input and output of the FILECONV program.
Specify a different name for the output file, or
rename the input file.
5-21
Cannot write to filename
FILECONV cannot open the output file. You may
have specifIed an invalid drive, path, or filename. It
is also possible that the disk directory is full.
Check the typing and try the conversion again. Refer
to the IBM PC DOS User's Guide for rules on naming
files. If the disk contains a large number of files, use
a different disk or erase unneeded files from the disk.
Cannot write to filename. Diskette is full.
FILECONV cannot write to the output file after
having opened it successfully. The disk is full.
Repeat the conversion after erasing unneeded files
from the disk, or use a different disk for the output
file.
File conversion failed
This message appears after any error that
FILECONV encounters when reading its-input file or .
writing its output file. See the specific error message
in this list for the recommended action.
Incorrect line count at nnnn
Incomplete CRC sequence at line nnnn
Incorrect CRC sequence at line nnnn
Invalid character in input file "x"
The FILECONV program displays these messages
when converting ASCII files received from a host
back to their original binary format. Generally these
messages indicate that an error occurred when
transferring the ASCII version of the file between the
PC and the host.
5-22
The nnnn represents the line number in the ASCII
version of the file, which is not the same as the line
number in the binary version.
It may be necessary for the owner of the binary file
to repeat the steps of converting it to ASCII and
transmitting it to the host before other users can save
it to their pes.
Input file was not prepared by FILECONV
The FILECONV program cannot find the header
information that it puts in the ASCII files it
generates. This message indicates that you are
trying to convert a file back to its original binary
format, but the ASCII version of the file was not
created by FILECONV.
No response is needed.
5-23
5-24
Part 2. PC/HOST File Transfer
and Terminal Emulator Program
(FTTERM) Reference
Appendix A. File Transfer
Messag~s
About this Appendix ..................... A-3
General FTTERM File Transfer Messages ..... A-3
IWS Host Messages (lNWOOnnl) ............. A-21
VMjCMS, MVSjTSO, and CICS Host Messages
(TRANSnn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-I
Notes:
A-2
About this Appendix
This appendix describes the messages that can appear on
any of these screens during a file transfer:
•
•
•
File transfer menu
Host messages screen
PC DOS session screen, when entering SEND and
RECEIVE commands from PC DOS.
For messages produced while running FTSETUP, see
"FTSETUP Messages" on page C-43.
For messages produced while running FILECONV, see
"FILECONV Messages" on page 5-21.
General FTTERM File Transfer
Messages
All batch requests processed. Press any key to
continue.
FTTERM has processed all commands in the batch
transfer request file.
Press any key to return to the file transfer menu.
Batch termination complete. Press any key to
continue.
At your request, FTTERM terminated the processing
of the batch file. Press any key to return to the file
transfer menu.
..\-3
Bytes transmitted: nnnn ofnnnn. Type T to
terminate.
FTTERM is reporting the status of a TRANSMIT
operation. No response is needed. If necessary, type
a T to terminate the transfer.
Cannot read file
FTTERM encountered an error when reading the file
that you want to send to the host. The file or disk
may be damaged.
Check the data in alphanumeric files with the TYPE
command or a text editor. If the problem persists, try
the transfer with a backup copy of the file.
Configuration file not found or empty
When starting, FTTERM could not find the file that
contains its default configuration (DEFAULT.SET),
or the file is empty.
Use FTSETUP to select a default configuration file.
See "Selecting a Default Configuration File" on
page C-41.
Configuration file not successfully loaded. Please
inspect configuration file.
The configuration file that you are trying to load
could not be found or contains invalid data.
Be sure you entered the correct filename, path, and
drive designation. If so, the data may be damaged, or
you may have made an invalid response when using
FTSETUP to create or modify the file.
A-4
Use a backup copy of the file or, if necessary, use
FTSETUP to create a new configuration file as
described in Appendix C, "Creating and Modifying
Configuration Files."
Configura tion file successfully loaded
FTTERM successfully loaded the specified
configura tion file. No response is needed.
Copy canceled
You canceled a COpy command by responding C to
the message "The file already exists. Do you wish to
Append, Cancel, or Replace?"
No response is needed.
Copy screen being terminated
At your request, FTTERM IS terminating a copy
screen operation. No response -is needed.-
Copy screen complete
A copy screen operation completed successfully. No
response is needed.
Copy screen termination complete
You terminated a copy screen operation by pressing
T . No response is needed.
A-;)
Copying screen. Type T to terminate.
You started a copy screen operation to a file or
printer. You can terminate the operation by pressing
T. No response is needed.
Destination or source filename is too long.
Maximum is 78.
The total length of a PC file specification, including
the drive letter, path, and filename, cannot exceed 78
characters.
Destination or source name is missing
A SEND or RECEIVE command contained only one
file specification.
Check the command for the correct format and try
again.
Error writing data. Data capture terminated.·
FTTERM was unable to write host data to the
specified file. The disk drive is not ready, the disk is
full or damaged, or there is a hardware problem.
Try the operation using a different disk.
Errors were detected in the following
batch requests: < command list with errors>
Do you wish to have the valid requests
processed? (Y or N)
After reading and analyzing the batch file, FTTER1-1
lists the transfer commands that contain errors of
various types. The errors are defined in "Batch
Transfer Status Messages" on page 4-37.
A-6
If you want to proceed with processing the remaining
commands, enter a Y. If you want to quit and correct
the batch file before proceeding, enter an N.
Establish connection if necessary
The PC is in 3101 emulation mode and is ready to
communicate with the host system.
If you have a modem, make the telephone connection
following the procedures in the modem's
documentation. You can enter the dialing sequence
by typing it in the window with this message and
pressing the Enter key.
If you are connected directly to an ASCII host, 3708,
or 3710 8-P A, this message indicates that FTTERM
cannot detect active communication. Check all the
cables and connections. If necessary, seek technical
assistance.
File transfer terminated due to the following PC DOS
detected error: xxxxxxxx .Press any keyh)_contin1,le._
FTTERM is reporting an error that was detected by
PC DOS. The xxxxxxxx can be one of the following:
Diskette is write protected
Verify that you are using the correct diskette. If
so, remove its write-protect tab, re-insert it, and
press any key to proceed.
DOS error: code xx
PC DOS encountered an error when reading from
or writing to the PC disk. If sending, check the
PC file for damaged data. If receiving, repeat the
transfer with a different disk. If the problem
continues, the PC may have hardware problems.
You can obtain specific information about the
error by locating the error code in the DOS
Technical Reference.
A-7
Drive notready
The drive door is not shut, there is no diskette in
the drive, or the PC has hardware problems.
File access denied. Filename incorrect or diskette is
full.
The PC disk does not have enough space to save
the file. Use a different disk or erase unneeded
files and try the transfer again.
File not found or invalid file specification
The PC file specified in a TRANSMIT command
does not exist, or the drive letter, path, or
filename in a TRANSMIT or SAVE command is
incorrect. Check the entries and try the transfer
again.
Invalid drive specified
You specified a drive designation that is not
defined in the PC configuration. Normally,
drives A and B are allowed for diskette systems;
drives A, B, and C are allowed for unpartitioned
fixed disk systems. Refer to the IBM PC DOS
User's Guide for more information.
No more files
The PC disk directory contains the maximum
number of entries. Erase unneeded files or use a
different disk and try the transfer again.
Path not found
You specified a directory or subdirectory that
does not exist on the designated drive. Check the
drive designation and the spelling of the path.
Read fault
FTTERM encountered an error when trying to
read data from a PC disk. Usually this indicates
a defective disk; occasionally it can indicate
hardware problems. Try the operation with a
different disk.
:\-0
Too many open files
When running in concurrent mode, the number of
files opened by the PC DOS and FTTERM
sessions exceeds the allowed maximum. Swi tch to
the PC DOS session and close files or exit from
the PC application program. Then try the
transfer again.
If this problem occurs frequently, you can create
or modify a CONFIG.SYS file to include a FILES
line with a value greater than 8. Refer to the
DOS Reference for more information.
Write fault
FTTERM encountered an error when trying to
write data to a PC disk. Usually this indicates a
defective disk; occasionally it can indicate
hardware problelTIs. Try the operation with a
different disk.
File transfer terminated due to following Host
detected error: xxxxxxxx Press any key to continue.
The host file transfer program encountered an error
that prevented further processing of the file transfer.
Locate the specific host error xxxxxxxx in this
appendix.
File transmit canceled
You canceled a TRANSl\IIT command by pressing T.
No response is needed.
File transmit complete
The file was successfully sent to the host. Switch to
the host session, save the file, and exit from the
editor in the usual way. You can log off and
disconnect from the host, if desired.
A-~J
Framing error. (Check baud rate, modem
connection.)
The Asynchronous Communications Adapter detected
a framing error in the data received from the host.
Check the configuration file to verify that the line
speed matches the port configuration at the ASCII
host, 3708, or 3710 8-PA. Also check the cable
connections. If you are using a modem, be sure it is
compatible with the host. (If you are communicating
through a 3708 or 3710 8-PA, the modem must be
compatible with Bell 203, Bell 212-A, or CCITT
Recommendation V.22bis.)
A framing error may also occur when:
•
You log off from a host session and do not return
to the file transfer menu and press the Disconnect
key. (Default is Alt-F6.)
•
Someone has restarted the 3708 or 3710 8-PA.
Whatever the cause, a framing error can result in the
host session screen being filled with random
characters.
..
..
Key not defined
The key or combination of keys that you pressed has
no definition in the configuration file you are using.
Invalid options specified. Copy canceled.
The only valid option for a COpy screen to file
command is APPEND. There are no valid options for
a COpy screen to printer command.
Check the entries and try the transfer again.
A-IO
Line break
A line break consists of a continuous stream of
spaces (low bits), typically lasting a quarter of a
second. It can be caused by any of the following:
•
The host cOlnputer has sent a line break to the
PC. Some hosts send a line break when you log
off. Your response to a line break during a host
session depends on the requirements of the host
system.
•
A 3708 or 3710 8-PA has sent a line break to the
PC as a result of being restarted. Repeat the
steps for logging on to the 3708 or 3710 8-PA.
•
A line break may also occur unintentionally if the
communication line is poor or the cable
connections are not secure. Check these items.
Loading configuration file
FTTERM is loading the configuration file specified in
a LOAD command. No respons~ is ne~~e~.
Mode cannot be changed. Program is not resident.
When you load FTTERM in nonresident mode, it is
implied that it is also in nonconcurrent mode. See
"Using FTTERM in Nonresident Mode" on page 3-24.
Mode changed from concurrent to nonconcurrent
FTTERM changed its operating mode to
nonconcurrent in response to a MODE comnland. No
response is needed.
A-II
Mode changed from nonconcurrent to concurrent
FTTERM changed its operating mode to concurrent
in response to a MODE command. No response is
needed.
No communications card
The PC does not contain an Asynchronous
Communications Adapter (or equivalent), or the
adapter is defective or is not correctly installed. If
the Asynchronous Comnlunications Adapter is
defective, you should receive an error code on the
display when you load DOS.
Verify that the adapter is set up and installed
correctly. Seek technical assistance if necessary.
No valid requests found. Press any key to continue.
The batch transfer request file was empty, or every
command in it contained at least one error.
Be sure that you entered the correct filename. If so,
correct its contents and try the operation again.
Options field too long. Maximum is 80.
The options field of the SEND or RECEIVE command
con tains more than 80 characters, including spaces.
Try the command again with fewer options.
Please establish your host session before transferring
files.
FTTERM cannot detect an active link with the host
after you entered a transfer command or batch
transfer cOlnmand.
A-12
Switch to the host session and check the status of the
host link. If it is not active, follow the procedures in
"Starting a Host Session" on page 3-6. If the problem
continues, notify the system administrator.
Please ready printer or type T to terminate
The printer is not online, or there is a problem with
the cable or connections.
Verify that the printer is turned on, is online, and
has a supply of paper. Check the cable connections.
If you cannot solve the problem, type a T to
terminate the transfer. If necessary, seek technical
assistance.
Printer not ready
The printer is not online, or there is a problem with
the cable or connections.
Verify that the printer is turned on, is online, and
has a supply of paper. Check the cable connections.
If necessary, seek technical assistance.
Printer not ready. Correct or press T to terminate
data capture.
The printer is not online, or there is a problem with
the cable or connections.
Verify that the printer is turned on, is online, and
has a supply of paper. Check the cable connections.
If you cannot solve the problem, type a T to
terminate the transfer. If necessary, seek technical
assistance.
A-13
Processing batch file
FTTERM is reading the specified batch file and
checking the format of each transfer command. No
response is needed.
Receive buffer overflow
Data is arriving too fast to be stored in a file or
printed.
If the host supports XONjXOFF pacing, you should
enable this feature in the configuration file. This lets
the PC send the XOFF character (ASCII DC3) to
suspend transmission from the host when the receive
buffer is nearly full. When the receive buffer
becomes almost empty, the PC sends the XON
character (ASCII DCI) to start the transmission
again.
See also the notes on page 5-7.
Retransmission count is nn
FTTERM or the host file transfer program detected
an error in the data transfer. The block of data is
sent repeatedly until it is transferred without errors.
The nn represents the number of times the transfer is
repeated.
If this message continues, it usually indicates noise
on the communication line. It can also indicate loose
cable connections. Check these items. If using a
dial-up line, try placing the call again.
A-14
Save canceled
You canceled a SAVE command by responding C to
the message "The file already exists. Do you wish to
Append, Cancel, or Replace?"
No response is needed.
Saving text ended
You stopped a SAVE operation by typing E.
FTTERM closes the PC file. No response is needed.
Screen copy available in resident mode only
You loaded FTTERM in nonresident mode. The
COpy command is valid for resident mode only. See
"Using FTTERM in Nonresident Mode" on page 3-24.
Termination in progress
At your request, FTTERM is terminating a file
transfer operation. No response is needed.
Termination is complete. Type any key to return to
main menu.
The termination of a transfer was completed as
requested. Type any key to return to the file transfer
menu.
Text is being saved. Type E to stop saving text and
close file.
FTTERM successfully opened the PC file for saving
text. When you have saved all required text, type E
to close the PC file. The PC file is created only if it
is successfully closed in this way.
A-15
The configuration file does not have enough records.
Please inspect the configuration fil~.
FTTERM detected an error in the format of a
configuration file. At startup, this indicates a
problem with the DEFAULT.SET file (and probably
the file you selected as the default configuration file
as well). This message can also appear when you use
the LOAD command.
If the message appears at startup, you can use
FTSETUP to either:
•
Select the same default configuration file again.
If the problem recurs, there is an error in the file
you are selecting. See the following paragraph.
•
Select a ,different default configuration file. See
"Selecting a Default Configuration File" on
page C-41 for more information.
If the message appears after you enter a LOAD
command, there is a problem in the file you are
loading. Use the CREATE option of FTSETUP to
create a new version of the configuration.file~ or
restore it from a backup copy.
Note that you should always use FTSETUP to create,
modify, and select configuration files. Do not edit
them directly.
The following error was found accessing your batch
file: xxxxxxxx
FTTERM is reporting an error that was detected by
PC DOS. The possible values for xxxxxxxx are listed
under the message "File transfer terminated due to
the following ~C DOS detected error: ... "
The file already exists. Do you wish to Append,
Cancel, or Replace? (A, C, or R)
You named a file as the destination in a SAVE
command that is already present on the PC disk.
Do one of the following:
•
Enter A to attach the data to the end of the
existing file.
•
Enter C to cancel the SAVE command. This lets
you enter a different filename or disk drive.
•
Enter R to replace the existing file with a new
file.
The help file is in error or not found.
FTSETUP.HLP - Press any key to escape help.
When you pressed Alt-Fl for help, FTSETUP could
not find the help message file FTSETUP.HLP, or
detected errors in the file.
Be sure that FTSETUP.HLP is in the same directory
with FTSETUP.EXE. If so, it may be damaged. Copy
FTSETUP.HLP from the FTTERM program diskette
into the directory with FTSETUP.EXE.
The help file is in error or not found.
FTTERM.HLP - Press any key to escape help.
When you pressed Alt-Fl for help, FTTERM could
not find the help message file FTTERM.HLP or
detected errors in the file.
Be sure that FTTERM.HLP is in the same directory
with FTTERM.EXE. If so, it may be damaged. Copy
FTTERM.HLP from the FTTERM program diskette
into the directory with FTTER1'LEXE.
A-Ii
The host link has been disconnected
You pressed the key sequence to disconnect from the
host session (Alt-F6). No response is needed.
The host link is in use by the printer session. Please
try later.
The host is sending a file to the PC printer. You
cannot conduct a host session during the print
operation.
You can wait until the print operation is finished or
terminate the transfer.
The translate file, DEFAULT.TBL, was not found.
Please reload.
When starting, FTTERM could not find the file that
contains its character set translation table
(DEFAULT.TBL).
See "Selecting a Character Translation Table." on
page 2-15 for the procedure that creates the
DEFAULT.TBL file.
There are more than 20 batch entries. The following
batch requests will not be processed:
The batch transfer request file that you specified has
more than 20 transfer commands. The additional
commands are listed under the message.
No response is needed. However, to have the
commands processed, you must modify the batch file,
create a new batch file, or enter the commands
individually.
A-18
There was an error loading the configuration file.
The error was detected on line nn.
FTTERM detected an error in the data contained in a
configuration file. Usually this indicates that an
invalid response was entered when creating or
modifying the configuration file. This message can
appear when you start FTTERM and when you use
the LOAD command.
If the message appears at startup, you can use
FTSETUP to either:
•
Select the same default configuration file again.
If the problem recurs, there is an error in the file
you are selecting. See the following paragraph.
•
Select a different default configuration file. See
"Selecting a Default Configuration File" on
page C-41 for more information.
If the message appears after you enter a LOAD
command, there is a problem in the file you are
loading. Use the CREATE option of FTSETUP to
create a new version of the configuration file.
Figure C-2 on page C-14 shows the valid responses to
each prompt. If you think the file has been damaged,
restore it from a backup copy.
Note that you should always use FTSETUP to create,
modify, and select configuration files. Do not edit
them directly.
Transmit buffer full
The transmit buffer (255 characters) is almost full or
is already full. You may have defined a key that
produces a sequence of characters that is too long.
There may also be a problem that is preventing the
Asynchronous Communications Adapter from sending
characters.
,,\-19
Waiting. Press Alt-FIO to cancel.
You pressed a key whose definition includes the wait
function. FTTERM is waiting for a specified
character from the host. You can cancel the wait
function (and the remainder of the key definition) by
pressing Alt-FIO.
See "Using the Wait Function in Key Definitions" on
page C-37 for an explanation of the wait function.
Waiting for host response to termination request
At your request, FTTERM is terminating a file
transfer operation. No response is needed.
,-\-20
IWS Host Messages (INWOOnnI)
Note: The text of messages identified
by numbers in the format INWOOnnI can
be changed by the system administrator.
Therefore, the text of these messages
may not be exactly as shown in this
appendix. The meaning of the message
and your response, however, are the
same.
If you receive a message that is not
listed or one that you do not
understand, consult the system
administrator.
INWOOOII
File transfer complete
The file transfer completed successfully. No response
is needed.
INW00021 Transmission error. Module = xxxxxxxx
RC=nnnn
An error was detected in the data transfer between
the host and the PC. This may be an error in the
data being transferred or an unidentified system
error. The xxxxxxxx is the name of the module that
detected the error. The nnnn is the hexadecimal
return code that more identifies the error. The file
transfer is terminated.
Try the file transfer again. If the problem continues,
examine the file being transferred for incorrect
format or data. If necessary, notify the system
administra tor to analyze the error and to check the
status of the host connection and all the cOlnponents
involved.
A-21
INW0003I Host main storage unavailable. File
transfer terminated.
The host system issued a GETMAIN request to obtain
dynamic storage but the request could not be
satisfied. This can happen when many tasks use
system resources simultaneously. The file transfer is
termina ted.
Try the transfer again after waiting for a few
minutes. If the problem continues, notify the host
system administrator to increase the size of the CICS
partition.
INW0004I Invalid request code. File transfer
terminated.
The transfer command issued by FTTERM did not
specify GET or PUT for the transfer operation. The
file transfer is terminated.
Checj{ the typing on the command line and try the
transfer again.
It is also possible that the host file transfer program
IND$FILE is not installed correctly or an incorrect
version ·of the program is being used. If the command
format is correct, notify the host system
administrator of the error.
INW0005I
Host file missing or invalid.
The transfer command did not include a host
filename, it was longer than eight characters, or it
did not start with a letter. The file transfer is
terminated.
Check the host filename in the command line and try
the transfer again.
A-22
On a RECEIVE command from temporary storage
(FILE = TS option is specified), you can use an
asterisk (*) to represent the host filename as it
appears in the temporary storage queue header
record.
INW0006I
Invalid or conflicting option 'xxxxxxxx'.
Two conflicting options were specified (such as ASCII
and BINARY), an option was misspelled, or userIDs
in a FOR option were not correctly separated by
commas with no spaces. The file transfer is
termina ted.
Check the typing of the command and try the
transfer again.
INW0007I Error in Host Transfer File. File transfer
terminated.
The Host Transfer File INWFILE could not be
accessed because it is not correctly defined to VSAM
or CICS or because it is disabled in. the. eICS.
environment. The file transfer is terminated.
Notify the host system administrator.
INW0008I File transfer complete with records
truncated.
The file transfer was completed, but at least one of
the records was truncated because it exceeded the
maximum length of 32K bytes or because enough host
storage could not be obtained.
Check the contents of the file at the host. Try the
transfer again if necessary.
A-23
INW0009I
Invalid userID 'nnnn'.
The cO,mmand specified an invalid userID in a FOR
or FROM option. The file transfer is terminated.
Check the entries and try the command again.
UserIDs must be from one to four characters and
must be defined to CICS.
INWOOIOI File xxxxxxxx already exists. Specify the
REPLACE option ..
A host file already exists with the name specified in a
SEND command. The file transfer is terminated.
To avoid deleting the existing file, rename the
existing host file or use a different host filename in
the SEND command. To replace the existing host
file, use the REPLACE option.
INWOOIII No more space in Host Transfer File.
Transfer terminated.
No more space is available in the Host Transfer File
INWFILE. The file transfer is terminated.
Switch to the host session and use the DOS/VSE
Move Utilities to delete unneeded files, or use a
RECEIVE command (without the KEEP option) to
store files at the PC while deleting them at the host.
If neither of these is practical, notify the system
administrator that the size of INWFILE must be
increased.
INW0012I
File xxxxxxxx not found.
The host file specified in a RECEIVE command is not
present in the Host Transfer File. For a shared file
(one sent with the FOR option), you may be using the
wrong userID with the FROM option of the
RECEIVE command. The file transfer is terminated.
Use the DISPLAY function of the DOSjVSE Move
Utilities for a list of files and valid userIDs in the
Host Transfer File. Try the command again with the
correct filename and options.
INW0013I
You are not authorized to access file
xxxxxxxx.
You entered a RECEIVE command with a FROM
option, but the specified host file was not shared with
your userID with a FOR or PUBLIC option.
Use the DISPLAY function of the DOSjVSE Move
Utilities for a list of public and shared files available
to you. Try the command again with the correct
filename and options.
INW0014I Internal system error. Module = xxxxxxxx
RC=nnnn
An unexpected return code was received from the
host file transfer manager while reading from or
writing to the Host Transfer File. A system error
probably occurred before the read or write operation
was completed. The xxxxxxxx is the name of the
module that detected the error. The nnnn is the
hexadecimal return code that identifies the error.
The file transfer is terminated.
Use the DISPLAY function of the DOS/VSE Move
Utilities to check the status of the host file. If the
problem continues, notify the host system
administrator.
A-25
INW0015I File transfer complete but share not
successful.
A SEND- command was completed successfully, but
the sharing specified in the FOR option could not be
completed. Either the Host Transfer File INWFILE
is full or an unidentified system error occurred.
If possible, free some space in the Host Transfer File
and try the command again. If necessary, notify the
host system administrator to increase the size of
INWFILE.
INW00161 File transfer complete but erase not
successful.
A RECEIVE command was completed successfully,
but the host file could not be erased because of a
system problem.
Use the ERASE function of the DOSjVSE Move
Utilities to erase the file.
INW00171
forced.
File transfer complete with binary option
You issued a RECEIVE command with the ASCII
option specified either explicitly or by default, but
the file was previously sent to the host with the
BINARY option in effect. Since the file would be
unusable at the PC if the ASCII option were actually
used on the receive, the host file transfer program
used the BINARY option instead.
If this is a text file and you want it to be in EBCDIC
format at the host, it must be sent to the host without
the BINARY option.
A-26
INW00181
Error writing to damaged or full diskette.
The file could not be received successfully because
the PC diskette or fixed disk is full or damaged.
Free some space on the disk or use a different disk.
Try the transfer again.
INW00191 No data stored in Host Transfer File. PC
file empty or binary.
An empty PC file was sent, or a binary file was sent
with the ASCII option specified either explicitly or by
default. The file is identified by a question mark in
the Host Transfer File.
Check the PC file. Specify the BINARY option if it
is a binary file.
INW00201
Input command too long.
The length of the transfer command produced by
FTTERM exceeds the maximum command length for
CICS (80 characters). This can result from using too
many userIDs in a FOR option of a SEND command.
The file transfer is terminated.
Shorten the command as necessary and try the
transfer again.
INW00211
TS queue qname not found.
The temporary storage queue name specified in the
QNAME option of a RECEIVE command (or the
default queue name) could not be found. The file
transfer is terminated.
Use the CEBR transaction to check whether the
queue exists and whether it contains any data. If
necessary, create the required queue with a SEND
command or a user transaction.
INW00221
File stored in TS queue qname.
The PC file was successfully stored in the indicated
temporary storage queue. No response is needed.
INW00241 File stored in TS queue qname. Control
given to program progname.
The PC file was successfully stored in the indicated
temporary storage queue. Communication between
the host and PC sessions is terminated. Control is
given to the user program specified in the PROGRAM
option of the SEND command.
No response is needed.
INW00251
File received from TS queue qname.
The PC file was successfully received from the
indicated temporary storage queue. No response is
needed.
INW00261 Record size excee"ds 32767 "bytes~-"Fne
transfer terminated.
The maximum size of records in a SEND transfer is
32,767 bytes. You are probably sending a large
binary file with the default ASCII and CRLF options.
The file transfer is terminated.
Try the transfer again with the BINARY or NOCRLF
option.
A-:28
INW0027I File transfer terminated by program
progname. RC = nnnn
A non-zero return code was received from the
indicated program. The nnnn represents the
hexadecimal return code. The file transfer is
terminated.
Notify the systelll administrator to analyze the error.
INW0028I
name.
Invalid queue name or program name
A transfer command contained an invalid name in a
QNAME or PROGRAlVI option. Temporary storage
queue names and user program names must start with
CFTR and must be at least six characters long. The
file transfer is terminated.
Check the entries in the SEND or RECEIVE
command and try the transfer again.
INW0029I TS queue qname already exists. Specify
REPLACE option.
The temporary storage queue specified in the
QNAME option of a SEND command (or the default
temporary storage queue) already exists. The
NOREPLACE option is in effect either by default or
by inclusion in the SEND command. The file transfer
is terminated.
If the existing queue is to be deleted, try the transfer
using the REPLACE option.
A-29
INW00301
Temporary storage exhausted.
There is not enough temporary storage to allocate a
new queue for file transfer. The file transfer is
terminated.
Notify the host system administrator to free some
space or allocate additional space.
INW00311 Error reading TS queue qname.
EIBRCODE = nnnn Module = INWPxxxx
An unexpected error occurred while trying to read
the indicated temporary storage queue. The nnnn
represents the first 2 bytes of the hexadecimal
EIBRCODE returned by CICS. The file transfer is
terminated.
Notify the host system administrator to analyze the
error.
INW00321
Failure to link to program progname.
The indicated program could not be linked to because
it does not exist, it is not defined in the CICS
processing program table, or it is disabled.
When the FILE = HTF option is specified explicitly or
by default, one of the following occurs:
A-30
•
If progname is INWFMGR, the file transfer is
terminated since the Host Transfer File cannot be
accessed.
•
If progname is INWNTFY, the file transfer is
completed, but a notification message could not be
sent.
When the FILE = TS option is specified, one of the
following occurs:
•
On SEND, the file is stored in the temporary
storage queue, but the invocation of a user
program specified wi th PROGRAM failed.
•
On RECEIVE, the file transfer is terminated.
Use the CEMT transaction to check and correct the
status of the program. Then try the transfer again.
Error writing TS queue qname.
EIBRCODE = nnnn MODULE = INWPxxxx
INW00331
An unexpected error occurred while trying to write
to the indicated temporary storage queue. The nnnn
represen ts the first 2 bytes of the hexadecimal
EIBRCODE returned by CICS. The file transfer is
termina ted.
Notify the host system administrator to analyze the
error.
Error deleting TS queue qname.
EIBRCODE = nnnn MODULE = INWPxxxx
INW00341
An unexpected error occurred while trying to delete
the indicated temporary storage queue. The nnnn
represents the first 2 bytes of the hexadecimal
EIBRCODE returned by CICS. The file transfer is
terminated.
Notify the host system administrator to analyze the
error.
A-31
INW00351
File transfer complete. Notify failed.
RC=xxxx
The file was successfully transferred, but a
notification message could not be sent to a user
specified with FOR or FROM. The return code xxx x
is one of the following:
•
•
•
0002 = The online message file IESTRFL could
not be accessed.
0004 = The message routine file IESROUT could
not be accessed.
0008 = The VSE/SP control file IESCNTL could
not be accessed.
Notify the system administrator to analyze the
message.
INW00361 Security violation: Failure to access a
protected resource.
The file transfer transaction (IND$) performs
resource security level checking. Either the user
program specified in the PROGRAM option or a
resource accessed by the program does not have the
correct resource level in its PPT or FCT entry.
If the system uses resource security level checking
for the temporary storage queues CFTRxxxx, your
userID is not authorized to access these queues. The
file transfer is terminated.
:\-32
A panel similar to the following appears in the host
session:
IESPRBDC1
ONLINE PROBLEM DETERMINATION DATA COLLECTION
The transaction you were executing ended
abnormally.
Information about this incident has been
stored for later problem determination.
Specifics about this incident are given below:
Transaction 10:
Task 10:
Program 10:
IND$
2835
INWPCCOM
Abend Code: AEY7
Abend Date: 7/19
Abend Time: 13:31:20
Another panel is displayed when you press Enter.
It is the panel you were working on when the
error occurred. Examine it carefully. and note
any information which may be useful in finding
the error.
PRESS ENTER WHEN YOU HAVE COPIED ALL THE HIGHLIGHTED
INFORMATION.
Notify the system administrator-to analyze the error.If you are familiar with the VSE/SP system, use the
Online Problem Determination (OLPD) facility to
determine which protected resource you were trying
to access.
INW00371 Abnormal end in host session. File
transfer terminated.
A program running in the host session ended
abnormally. The file transfer is terminated. A panel
similar to the one shown in message INW00361
appears.
Notify the system administrator to analyze the error.
If you are familiar with the VSE/SP system, use the
Online Problem Determination (OLPD) facility to
determine which protected resource you were trying
to access.
INW00981 Load error for message module
INWPMSxx.
The indicated message module, which contains the
file transfer messages displayed at the PC, could not
be loaded because it does not exist, it is not defined
in the CICS processing program table, or it is
disabled. The file transfer is completed, and the
correct message is displayed in the host session.
Use the CEMT transaction to check and correct the
status of the program. Then try the transfer again.
,INW00991 Error accessing message file for message
INWnnnnI.
The host message file (IESTRFL) could not be
accessed because it is damaged, closed, or disabled, or
the indicated message was not found in the message
file.
Notify the system administrator to check the status
of the message file.
A-34
VMjCMS, MVS/TSO, and CICS
Host Messages (TRANSnn)
TRANSOO
canceled
Error in file transfer: File transfer
The eICS file transfer transaction detected an error
during the file transfer. The error may have been in
the data being transferred or an unidentified system
error. It is also possible that the host file transfer
program (IND$FILE) is not installed correctly.
Examine the source file for incorrect format or data.
If you find no problems, advise the host system
administrator to verify the installation and setup of
IND$FILE. For example, if the TST parameter in
CIeS is configured ON, this message will appear once
for every two file transfers.
TRANSOI
File transfer command being processed
FTTERM is processing the file transfer command.
This message appears only when you enter a file
transfer command in the PC DOS session.
TRANS02
Number of bytes transferred so far:
= = >
This message reports the status of a transfer when
you enter a file transfer command in the PC DOS
seSSIon.
TRANS03
File transfer complete
The file transfer was completed successfully. No
response is needed. This message appears for
transfers initiated by a SEND or RECEIVE command
entered in the PC DOS session.
A-35
TRANS04 File transfer complete with records
segmented
This message means one of the following:
•
GIGS. The file transfer was completed
successfully. At least one of the records sent
exceeded the maximum logical length of 32,767
bytes. The record was segmented into separate
items in the temporary storage queue.
This message may appear when you use the CRLF
option with a file that does not contain carriage
return/line feed characters. You should use the
BINARY option instead with such files.
•
VM/GMS and MVS/TSO. The file transfer was
completed successfully. Any PC records that
exceeded the host file's logical record length have
been segmented into multiple records at the host.
TRANS05 Personal computer filespec incorrect: File
transfer canceled
There is an error in the pC DOS file specification.
Either the disk drive, path, filename, or extension is
in error. When sending a PC file, this message can
also indicate that the file could not be found. This
message appears after you enter a SEND or
RECEIVE command from the DOS system prompt.
Check your typing. If necessary, refer to the IBNI PC
DOS User's Guide for details on entering file
specifications. Use the DIR command to verify that a
PC file to be sent exists on the drive and path
specified.
A-36
TRANS06
canceled
Command incomplete: File transfer
All of the required parts of a SEND or RECEIVE
command are not entered. This message appears
after you enter a SEND or RECEIVE cOlnmand froln
the DOS system prompt.
Note the format for the command as displayed on the
SEND REQUEST FORMAT or RECEIVE REQUEST
FORMAT window. Enter the command with all the
required parts. If you are preparing a batch transfer
request file, you can see Figure 4-2 on page 4-8 and
Figure 4-5 on page 4-23 for the correct formats.
TRANS07
Cannot link to host: File transfer canceled
FTTERM cannot detect a host session in progress
when you enter a SEND or RECEIVE cOlnmand.
Switch to the host session and verify that the host is
operational. If so, switch back to the File Transfer
Main Menu and try the transfer again. If the
problem continues, notify the host system·
adminis tra tor.
TRANS08
canceled
FTTERM not loaded: File transfer
You entered a SEND or RECEIVE command in the
PC DOS session, but FTTERM has not been loaded.
Load FTTERl'vI in the normal way (resident mode) as
described in Chapter 3, "Using FTTERl'vl" on
page 3-1.
TRANS09
canceled
Error reading file from disk: File transfer
FTTERM encountered an error reading the PC file.
This message appears only when you enter a SEND
or RECEIVE command at the DOS system prompt.
Send the same command from the file transfer menu
to receive a more specific error message. Then locate
that message in this appendix.
TRANSIO Host has not responded within timeout
period: File transfer canceled
The host did not respond to FTTERM in the period
specified for the inactivity timeout in the
configuration file.
Switch to the host session. If the host is not
responding to commands, it may indicate that the
host has a problem. You can wait for the condition
to clear (it may be necessary to repeat the host logon
sequence when the condition clears), or cancel the
transfer without waiting by pressing the PF2 key
sequence several times (default is F2) while in the
host session. This should return the host session to
the command ready state.
If the problem continues, increase the value for the
inactivity timeout in the configuration file.
A timeout error can also occur when certain DOS
operations are performed concurrently with the file
transfer. Specifically, the following DOS commands
can cause this error:
•
•
•
TYPE filename
COpy filename CON
COpy CON filename.
TRANSII
canceled
Lost contact with host: File transfer
The communication between the PC and host was
lost during a file transfer (DSR went low).
Re-establish the connection and start the transfer
again.
TRANSI2
canceled
Error writing file to disk: File transfer
FTTERM encountered an error when writing data to
the PC disk. This message appears only when you
enter a SEND or RECEIVE command at the DOS
system prompt.
Send the same command from the file transfer menu
to receive a more specific error message. Then locate
that message in this appendix.
TRANSI3
canceled
Error writing file to host: File transfer
An error occurred at the host when you tried to send
a file. The host canceled the file transfer.
A-39
Switch to the host session. If the host is not in the
command ready state, press the CLEAR key sequence
(default is the Home key) several times. If the host
does not return to the command ready state, press the
PF2 key sequence (default is F2) until the host
becomes ready. When the host returns to the
command ready state, switch to the File Transfer
Main Menu and try the transfer again.
If the problem continues, contact the host system
administra tor.
TRANS 14
canceled
Error reading file from host: File transfer
An error occurred at the host when you tried to
receive a file.
See message TRANS 13.
TRANS15 Required host storage unavailable: File
transfer canceled
This message means one of the following:
•
CICS. The CICS file transfer transaction could
not obtain enough host storage for its own control
blocks, I/O buffers, and save areas. Request
additional storage from the system administrator.
•
VM/CMS and MVS/TSO. You do not have
enough main storage allocated to you at the host.
Typically, you need at least 30K bytes of main
storage for file transfer in addition to that
required by the the host session. This storage
should not be confused with disk storage.
Contact the host system administrator.
TRANS16
canceled
Incorrect request code: File transfer
The host received an invalid transfer request.
FTTERM did not send the expected values for the
first part of the command.
Notify the system administrator. It is possible that
the host does not have the correct version of the host
file transfer program.
TRANS17
Invalid filename: File transfer canceled
CICS. The CICS filename was not valid for the CICS
host. Correct names must consist of one to eight
letters and digits.
Correct the filename and try the transfer again.
TRANS17 Missing or incorrect TSO data set name:
File transfer canceled
TSO. The TSO data set name is missing from the
command or is not in the correct format. --With a RECEIVE cOlnmand, it is possible that the data set
could not be found at the host.
Correct the TSO data set name in the command and
try the transfer again.
TRANS18
canceled
Incorrect option specified: File transfer
Your command included an unrecognized option.
See "Host Considerations" on page 4-40 for
information on the options you can use with SE~D
and RECEIVE commands for the different hosts .
.--\--! 1
TRANS19
canceled
Error handling host file: File transfer
CICS . . An error occurred in one of the user exits
when handling the file. On a GET operation this can
be because the filename did not match the name of
the current terminal file or because an error occurred
while constructing or reading the file. On a PUT
operation this can occur because the file could not be
stored in temporary storage for the current file or
because an error occurred while reading the file.
Check the contents of the current file for this
terminal. If user programming provided the data for
the file, check the user program for program errors
and resource constraints.
TRANS19 Error while reading or writing to host
disk: File transfer canceled
VM/CMS and MVS/TSO. There is not enough disk
space allocated to you at the host system. This is a
general message for an unsuccessful return code from
a file transfer operation. It usually results fromsending a file to a TSO host when the fiie' {s farger
than the default allocation or the allocation specified
with the SPACE option.
Switch to the host session and examine messages that
identify the failure. Either increase the value of the
SP ACE option or contact the host system
administra tor.
TRANS27
Termination request complete
You interrupted a file transfer with Ctrl-Break that
was initiated by entering a SEND or RECEIVE
command in the PC DOS session.
No response is needed.
A-42
TRANS28
canceled
Invalid option xxxxxxxx: File transfer
The option you specified was not recognized, has an
incorrect value, or was positioned incorrectly in the
command line. The xxx xxx xx represents the invalid
option.
Try the command again with the corrected option.
See "Host Considerations" on page 4-40 for the
options you can use when issuing SEND and
RECEIVE commands to the different hosts.
TRANS29 Invalid option xxxxxxxx with receive: File
transfer canceled
The option you specified in a RECEIVE command is
valid for SEND commands only. The xxxxxxxx
represents the invalid option.
Try the command again without the option. See
"Host Considerations" on page 4-40 for the options
you can use when issuing SEND and RECEIVE
commands to the different hosts.
TRANS30 Invalid option xxxxxxxx with append: File
transfer canceled
The option you specified cannot be used with the
APPEND option. The xxxxxxxx represents the
invalid option.
Try the command without APPEND, or without the
invalid option. See "Host Considerations" on
page 4-40 for the options you can use when issuing
SEND and RECEIVE commands to the different
hosts.
A-43
TRANS34
eMS file not found: File transfer canceled
The specified CMS file in a RECEIVE command
could riot be found at the host.
Check your typing and try the command again.
Switch to the host session and review your filelist, if
necessary.
TRANS35
eMS disk is read-only: File transfer
canceled
You must have permission to write in the CMS disk
to which you are sending.
Check the filemode that you entered for the Cl\IS file.
If it is correct, you must change the permissions for
the CMS disk to read/write before you can send files
to it. Then try the transfer again. If necessary,
consult the host systeln administrator.
TRANS36
eMS disk is not accessed: File transfer
canceled
You have not accessed the CMS disk to which you
are sending.
Check the filemode you entered for the CMS file. If
it is correct, use the CMS ACCESS command to
access the required disk. Then try the transfer again.
A-~14
TRANS37
eMS disk is full: File tranSler
l;~.u.,-,,,-,. __ _
One of the following has occurred:
•
The CMS disk has become full.
•
The CMS disk has reached its maximum number
of files (3400).
•
The file has exceeded the maximum number of
data blocks (16060).
Remove unwanted files from the disk or try the
transfer using another disk with more available
space. If the problem is the result of an excessively
large PC file (greater than 1M byte), divide it into
smaller files. Then try the transfer again.
TRANS96 Not running in protocol conversion: File
transfer canceled
You entered a SEND or RECEIVE command but the
configuration file is not set up for protocol
conversion transfers.
Verify which method of file transfer is appropriate
for the host being used. U se SAVE or TRANSMIT if
native emulation is appropriate (these cannot be
entered in the PC DOS session).
If protocol conversion is appropriate, load the correct
configuration file and try again. See "Loading a
Configuration File" on page 3-18 It may be necessary
to modify a configuration to provide for protocol
conversion. See "Modifying an Existing
Configuration File" on page C-12.
TRANS97 Host link busy with printer data: File
transfer canceled
The host is addressing the PC printer as a separate
logical unit. You cannot conduct a host session
during the print operation.
This capability is available when a system
administrator for the 3708 or 3710 8-P A has created a
user defined terminal that supports multiple logical
units. See Appendix E, "IBM 3708 and 3710 8-PA
Considerations" on page E-l for more information.
You can wait until the print operation is finished, or
you can send a Suspend Printer command. Send a
Resume Printer command when ready. Consult the
system administrator for the correct commands.
TRANS98
canceled
File transfer facility busy: File transfer
You tried to issue a file transfer command from DOS
while another command was being processed through
the file transfer menu.
Wait until the current transfer is complete before
doing the second transfer.
TRANS99 Host program error xxxxxxxx: File
transfer canceled
A host program error occurred.
Record the error message represented by xxxxxxxx.
Try to resolve the problem by comparing the host
documentation for the error with the options used in
the transfer command. If necessary, consult the host
system administrator.
A-46
Appendix B. FTTERM Menus
About this Appendix ...................... B-3
The File Transfer Main Menu ............... B-3
The File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emula tion ............................. B-9
B-1
Notes:
B-2
About this Appendix
This appendix is a detailed reference of the items that
appear on the File Transfer Main Menu and the File
Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation.
The File Transfer Main Menu
The File Transfer Main Menu (Figure B-1) is the central
menu for transferring files with SNA hosts using the
protocol conversion method. Chapter 3, "Using
FTTERM," describes accessing the File Transfer Main
Menu. Chapter 4, "Transferring Files Using the Protocol
Conversion Method," describes using it to transfer files.
FILE TRANSFER MAIN MENU
MODE: CONCURRENT
ill
Command
Description
1
2
3
4
5
SEND
RECEIVE
BATCH
LOAD
MODE
Send data from PC
Receive data to PC
Send/Receive multiple files
Load a configuration file
Toggle nonconcurrent and concurrent
Type an 10 number or Command and press ENTER.
===>
Alt-F1 = HELP Alt-F2 = RETURN
Alt-F4 = RETRIEVE Alt-F5 = COLOR
Alt-F6 = DISC Alt-F7 = MSGS Alt-Fa = FTTERM Alt-F9 = PC DOS
Alt-F10 = HOST
Figure
B-1.
The File Transfer Main Menu
The following list describes each of the items in the File
Transfer Main Menu:
MODE: (upper-left corner)
This item identifies whether FTTERM is operating in
CONCURRENT or NONCONCURRENT mode.
In concurrent mode, you can press the key sequence to
switch to the PC DOS session (default is Alt-F9) and
perform DOS commands like DIR and FORMAT. You
can also run PC DOS programs like a word processor
or spreadsheet.
In nonconcurrent mode, you cannot switch to a PC
DOS session during a file transfer, but file transfers
are performed more efficiently.
See also the MODE selection and Alt-F9.
SEND-Send data from PC
When you select this option, your next steps will be to
identify:
•
What you want to send (a PC disk file or screen
data generated during a PC DOS session or a host
session)
•
Where you want to send it (to a host file or the PC
printer).
RECEIVE-Receive data to PC
When you select this option, your next steps will be to
identify:
B-4
•
What you want to receive (a host file or screen
data generated during a PC DOS session or a host
session)
•
Where you want to receive it (in a PC file or at the
PC printer).
BATCH-Send/Receive multiple files
This option lets you specify the name of a batch file
containing up to 20 SEND and RECEIVE commands,
which you created earlier. S~e "Using a Batch File to
Transfer Multiple Files" on page 4-35 for more
information.
LOAD-Load a configuration file
This option lets you load a configuration file. See
"Loading a Configuration File" on page 3-18 for more
information.
MODE-Toggle nonconcurrent and concurrent
This option lets you change FTTERM's operating
mode between concurrent and nonconcurrent.
FTTERM normally operates in concurrent mode. You
can switch to nonconcurrent mode before performing
extensive file transfers. See "Selecting Concurrent or
Nonconcurrent Mode" on page 3-17, "Using FTTERlVI
in Nonresident Mode" on page 3-24, and "Using
FTTERM with Other Resident Programs" on page 3-26
for more information.
Type an ID number or Command and press ENTER.
This line is where you do either of the following:
•
Select an option by entering its ID number (such
as 1), its name (such as SEND), or the first letter
of its name (such as S). You are then prompted to
type the source, destination, and options for the
transfer.
•
Type the entire command as a single step.
When you finish typing the command, press the Enter
key to proceed. See "Entering a SEND Command" on
page 4-6 and "Entering a RECEIVE Command" on
page 4-22 for more information.
B-5
Alt-Fl = HELP
Press the Alt-Fl key sequence to display FTTERM's
help wiI}.dows. The help windows provide information
about command formats and options for file transfers,
and information about the other menu selections. See
"Displaying FTTERM's Help Windows" on page 3-20
for more information.
Alt-F2 = RETURN
Press the Alt-F2 key sequence to refresh the menu
display. This cancels any commands you have typed
but not yet entered, and clears any messages that
FTTERM has displayed over the menu.
Alt-F4=RETRIEVE
Press the Alt-F4 key sequence to retrieve your most
recent FTTERM command. Press Alt-F4 again to
retrieve the second most recent comInand. FTTERM
stores the five most recent commands. If you make a
menu selection, the retrieve function does not work
until you finish the operation or press the RETURN
key sequence (Alt-F2).
.
Alt-F5 = COLOR
. Press the Alt-F5 key sequence to toggle the. colors.
used with FTTERM menus and screens. There are
eight predefined color combinations.
Note: This key sequence appears
only when the PC uses a
Color/Graphics Adapter or
equivalent.
This is a separate function from color in a SNA host
session, as defined in a 3708 or 3710 8-PA user defined
terminal. (See Appendix E, "IBM 3708 and 3710 8-P A
Considera tions.")
Alt-F6=DISC
Press the Alt-F6 key sequence to disconnect from a
host session. Usually you press this after logging off
from the host.
If you are using a modem and a switched line, pressing
the DISC keys drops the telephone line (hangs up).
When you switch to the host session, one of the
following appears:
•
•
Auto-Dial Directory (if you have defined auto-dial
sequences)
A message advising you to enter a modem
command manually.
Alt-F7 = MSGS
Press the Alt-F7 key sequence to display to the Host
Messages screen. The Host Messages screen lists
messages that are received from the host during a
batch file transfer.
You can change the key sequence for the Host
1'lessages screen using FTSETUP. See
Appendix C, "Creating and Modifying Configuration
Files," for more information.
Alt-F8 = FTTERM
Press the Alt-F8 key sequence to return to the File
Transfer Main Menu from a host session, PC DOS
session,or Host Messages screen. Pressing these keys
has no effect while you are using the File Transfer
~lain Menu. Therefore the message appears there as a
relninder.
You can change the key sequence for returning to the
File Transfer l\'lain wlenu using FTSETUP. See
Appendix C, "Creating and Modifying Configuration
Files," for more information.
B-1
Alt-F9=PC DOS or Alt-F9=EXIT
Press the Alt-F9 key sequence to switch to a PC DOS
session (concurrent mode) or to exit from FTTERM to
PC DOS (nonconcurrent mode). You can switch to PC
DOS directly from a host session without going
through the File Transfer Main Menu.
You can change the key sequence for PC DOS or
EXIT using FTSETUP. See Appendix C, "Creating
and Modifying Configuration Files," for more
information.
Alt-FIO = HOST
Press the Alt-FIO key sequence to switch to a host
session. You can switch to a host session directly
from a PC DOS session (concurrent mode only)
without going through the File Transfer Main Menu.
You can change the key sequence for the host session
using FTSETUP. See Appendix C, "Creating and
Modifying Configuration Files," for more information.
B-8
The File Transfer Main Menu
Native Emulation
The File Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation
(Figure B-2) is the central menu for transferring files to
SNA or ASCII hosts using the native emulation method.
Chapter 3, "Using FTTERM," describes accessing the
File Transfer Main Menu. Chapter 5, "Transferring Files
Using the Native Emulation Method," describes using it
to transfer files.
FILE TRANSFER MAIN MENU- NATIVE EMULATION
MODE: CONCURRENT
10
Command
Description
1
2
3
4
5
SAVE
TRANSMIT
COpy
LOAD
MODE
Receive data to PC
Send data from PC
Copy host screen to file or printer
Load a configuration file
Toggle nonconcurrent and concurrent
Type an 10 number or Command and press ENTER.
===>
Alt-Fl = HELP Alt-F2 = RETURN
Alt-F4 = RETRIEVE AIt-F5 = COLOR
Alt-Fa = FTTERM Alt-F9 = PC DOS
Alt-F 10 = HOST
Alt-FS = DISC
Figure
B-2.
The File Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation
B-9
The following list describes each of the items in the File
Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation:
MODE: (upper-left corner)
This item identifies whether FTTERM is operating in
CONCURRENT or NONCONCURRENT mode.
In concurrent mode, you can press the key sequence to
switch to the PC DOS session (default is Alt-F9) and
perform DOS commands like DIR and FORMAT. You
can also run PC DOS programs like a word processor
or spreadsheet.
In nonconcurrent mode, you cannot switch to a PC
DOS session during a file transfer, but file transfers
are performed more efficiently.
See also the MODE selection and Alt-F9.
SAVE-Receive data to PC
This option lets you direct data that a host program is
sending to the PC screen into:
•
•
A PC file
A PC printer.
TRANSMIT-Send data from PC
This option lets you send a PC file into a host
program (such as a line-oriented text editor) as if you
were typing it on a 3101 keyboard.
LOAD-Load a configuration file
This option lets you load a configuration file. See
"Loading a Configuration File" on page 3-18, "Using
FTTERM in Nonresident Mode" on page 3-24, and
"Using FTTER:rv1 with Other Resident Programs" on
page 3-26 for more information.
I3-10
MODE'-Toggle nonconcurrent and concurrent
This option lets you change FTTERM's operating
mode between concurrent and nonconcurrent.
FTTERM normally operates in concurrent mode. You
can switch to nonconcurrent mode before performing
extensive file transfers. See "Selecting Concurrent or
Nonconcurrent Mode" on page 3-17 for more
information.
Type an ID number or Command and press ENTER.
This line is where you do either of the following:
•
Select an option by entering its ID number (such
as 2), its name (such as TRANSMIT), or the first
letter of its name (such as T). You are then
prompted to type the source or destination for the
transfer.
•
Type the entire command as a single step.
When you finish typing the command, press the Enter
key to proceed. See "Saving Host Data at the PC" on
page 5-7 and "Transmitting a PC File to a Host" on
page 5-11 for more information.
Alt-Fl = HELP
Press the Alt-F1 key sequence to display FTTERM's
help windows. The help windows provide information
about command formats and options for file transfers,
and information about the other menu selections. See
"Displaying FTTERM's Help Windows" on page 3-20
for more information.
Alt-F2 = RETURN
Press the Alt-F2 key sequence to refresh the menu
display. This cancels any commands you have typed
but not yet entered, and clears any messages that
FTTERM has displayed over the menu.
B-ll
Alt-F4 = RETRIEVE
Press the Alt-F4 key sequence to retrieve your most
recent FTTERM command. Press Alt-F4 again to
retrieve the second most recent command. FTTERM
stores the five most recent commands. If you make a
menu selection, the retrieve function does not work
until you finish the operation or press the RETURN
key sequence (Alt-F2).
Alt-F5=COLOR
Press the Alt-F5 key sequence to toggle the colors
used with FTTERM menus and screens. There are
eight predefined color combinations.
Note: This key sequence appears
only when the PC uses a
Color/Graphics Adapter or
equivalent.
This is a separate function from color in a SNA host
session, as defined in a 3708 or 3710 8-PA terminal
definition. (See Appendix E, "IBM 3708 and 3710
8-PA Considerations.")
Alt-F6 = DISC
Press the Alt-F6 key sequence to disconnect from a
host session. Usually you press this after logging off
from the host.
If you are using a modem and a dial-up line, pressing
the DISC keys drops the telephone line (hangs up).
When you switch to the host session, one of the
following appears:
•
•
B-12
Auto-Dial Directory (if you have defined auto-dial
sequences)
A message advising you to enter a modem
command manually.
Alt-F8 = FTTERM
Press the Alt-FS key sequence to return to the File
Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation from a host
session or PC DOS session. Pressing these keys has
no effect while you are using the File Transfer Main
Menu - Native Emulation. Therefore it appears
there as a reminder.
You can change the key sequence for returning to the
File Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation with
FTSETUP. See Appendix C, "Creating and
Modifying Configuration Files," for more information.
Alt-F9=PC DOS or Alt-F9=EXIT
Press the Alt-F9 key sequence to switch to a PC DOS
session (concurrent mode) or to exit from FTTERM to
PC DOS (nonconcurrent mode). You can switch to PC
DOS directly from a host session without going
through the File Transfer Main Menu - Native
Emulation.
You can change the key sequence for PC DOS or
EXIT with FTSETUP. See Appendix C, "Creating
and Modifying Configuration Files," for more
information.
AU-FlO = HOST
Press the Alt-FIO key sequence to switch to a host
session. You can switch to a host session directly
from a PC DOS session (concurrent mode only)
without going through the File Transfer Main Menu
- Native Emulation.
You can change the key sequence for the host session
with FTSETUP. See Appendix C, "Creating and
Modifying Configuration Files," for more information.
13-18
8-14
Appendix C. Creating and
Modifying Configuration Files
About this Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Using the FTSETUP Screens ................ C-6
Displaying the FTSETUP Function Selection
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Displaying FTSETUP's Help Windows ...... C-7
Selecting Screen Colors when Using FTSETUP C-8
Creating a Configuration File ............... C-8
Modifying an Existing Configuration File ..... C-12
Using the Configuration Worksheet .......... C-13
Running in Protocol Conversion lVIode? .... C-16
Protocol Converter? ................... C-17
Line Speed (Baud Rate) to be Used? ....... C-17
Half Duplex? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Parity? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Stop Bits? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Automatic New Line? .................. C-18
Automatic Line Feed? .. -... .- ... -. : :- .--.- . -. ~. C-19
Carriage Return? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
Character Sent at End of Message? ....... C-19
Scrolling? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
Prompt Character From Host? ........... C-20
Start/Stop (XON/XOFF) Enabled? ......... C-20
Communications Port? ................. C-20
25 Line Terminal Definition in 3708 or 3710
8-PA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
Host System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
Inactivity Timeout (in Minutes)? ......... C-21
Extended Code for Switch to xxxx? ........ C-22
Name of Host File Transfer Command?
C-23
W ould You Like to Change any of the Above
Entries? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23
Would You Like to Define any Auto-Dial
Sequences? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
Would You Like to Modify any Key
Definitions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
C-l
Defining Auto-Dial Sequences ..............
Displaying the Auto-Dial Definition Menu ..
Adding an Auto-Dial Definition ..........
Changing an Auto-Dial Definition ........
Deleting an Auto-Dial Definition .........
Listing the Auto-Dial Definitions .........
Quitting the Auto-Dial Definition Procedure
Defining the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Keyboard Definitions ............
Displaying the Key Definition Menu ......
Redefinable Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding or Modifying a Key Definition .....
U sing the W ai t Function in Key
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Key Definition ...............
Finding a Key Definition ...............
Listing the Key Definitions .............
Quitting the Key Definition Procedure .....
Selecting a Default Configuration File .......
Suppressing Selected Prompts ..............
FTSETUP Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-2
C-24
C-25
C-26
C-28
C-29
C-30
C-30
C-30
C-31
C-34
C-34
C-35
C-37
C-38
C-39
C-40
C-40
C-41
C-43
C-43
About this Appendix
This appendix explains how to use FTSETUP to do the
following:
•
•
•
Create a new configuration file
Modify an existing configuration file
Select a default configuration file.
This appendix includes a configuration worksheet to help
you collect the information you need to create or modify a
configuration file.
C-3
. Configuration File Overview
A configuration file contains the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
File transfer method (protocol conversion or native
emulation)
Type of SNA host, if you select protocol conversion
Communication line characteristics
Cursor action during a host session
Communication port at the PC (COM1 or COM2)
Key sequences for switching between FTIERM functions
Names and telephone numbers of modem contacts (auto-I
definitions)
Emulation of the 3101 keyboard (keyboard definition).
This appendix provides details about each item in a configur
file. It also includes step-by-step procedures for creating an
modifying configuration files using the FTSETUP program th
comes with FTTERM.
'
A configuration file is a text file, but it is subject to certain fl
restrictions. Therefore, do not edit a configuration file with
editor. Use FTSETUP to create or modify it.
Creating a Configuration File
You can create a configuration file in either of two ways:
•
By modifying an existing file. You can modify one of
sample files supplied with FTTERM or another previ(
created file. The modified file can replace the existir
be saved as a new file. See Appendix 0, "Sample
Configuration Files," for descriptions of the sample
configuration files. See "Modifying an Existing Con
File" on page C-12 for the procedure.
•
By defining an entirely new file. You can do this if
existing file is close enough to your needs to be ec
modified. You can also do this if the only copy of (
configuration file has been damaged or erased. S
"Creating a Configuration File" on page C-8 for tt
procedure.
C-4
Placing a Configuration File into Effect
You can place a configuration file into effect in either of two
ways:
•
SELECT it as the default configuration file. The configuration
file takes effect the next time you load PC DOS and start
FTTERM. It stays in effect until you load another
configuration file from FTTERM. You must select a default
configuration file as part of creating a working copy of
FTTERM. See "Selecting a Default Configuration File" on
page C-41 for the procedure.
•
Use the LOAD selection on the file transfer menu. The
configuration file takes effect immediately. It stays in effect
until you load another configuration file or until you load PC
DOS and start FTTERM, in which case the default
configuration file takes effect. See "Loading a Configuration
File" on page 3-18 for the procedure.
Displaying the Configuration File Currently in Effect
You can display the configuration file that is currently in effect by
entering LOAD? at the file transfer menu. If the default
configuration file is in effect, FTTERM displays DEFAULT.SET.
Viewing the Values in a Configuration File
You can view the current values in a configuration file in either of
two ways:
•
Display or print the configuration file with the TYPE
command provided by DOS. See "Understanding the Sample
Configuration Files" on page 0-4 for an explanation of the
file format.
•
Follow the procedure for modifying the configuration file
without actually modifying anything. See" Modifying an
Existing Configuration File" on page C-12 for the procedure.
C-G
U sing the FTSETUP Screens
This section provides information about using the
FTSETUP screens.
Displaying the FTSETUP Function
Selection Menu
FTSETUP's Function Selection Menu (Figure C-l on
page C-7) contains the following selections:
•
•
•
•
Select a default configuration file
Modify an existing configuration file
Create a new configuration file
Exit to PC DOS.
Follow these steps to display the Function Selection
Menu:
1. Do one of the following:
•
Diskette systems: Start attheDOS system prompt
(A». Insert the FTTERM working diskette -into
drive A.
•
Fixed disk systems: Start at the DOS system prompt
(C». If you copied the FTTERM files into a
subdirectory, use the CD command to change to
that subdirectory.
2. Enter:
FTSETUP
FTSETUP displays a trademark and copyright screen
and tells you to press any key to continue.
C-6
3. Press any key. FTSETUP displays the Function
Selection Menu:
FUNCTION SELECTION MENU
ill
Description
1
2
3
4
SELECT a default configuration file
MODIFY a configuration file
CREATE a configuration file
EXIT program
Type an 10 number or the first letter of a command and press ENTER.
===>
Alt-F1 = HELP Alt-F5= COLOR
Figure
C-l.
The FTSETUP Function Selection Menu
Displaying FTSETUP's Help
Windows
When using FTSETUP, you can get help with the items
currently on the screen by pressing Alt-Fl.
The help windows provide information on these topics:
•
Using the functions on the Function Selection 1'Ienu
•
Responding to each prompt that appears when creating
or modifying a configuration file
•
Using the selections on the Auto-Dial Definition
•
Using the selections on the Key Definition lVlenu
•
Changing screen colors when using FTSETUP.
~1enu
C-i
You are encouraged to use the Help windows as a primary
source of information about FTSETUP. Use these
procedures:
•
To select a topic from a help menu, move the cursor to
the topic and press the Enter key.
•
To proceed through a topic, press the PgUp and PgDn
keys.
•
To return from a topic to the help menu, press Alt-F3.
•
To return from a topic or the help menu to FTSETUP,
press Al t-F2.
Selecting Screen Colors when Using
FTSETUP
If you ~re using a color monitor, you can select from eight
predefined color combinations for FTSETUP screens by
pressing Alt-F5.
Creating a Configuration File
Follow these steps to create a new configuration file:
1. Complete the configuration worksheet. See "Using the
Configuration Worksheet" on page C-13. Consult the
host doculnentation or the system administrator for the
host, 3708, or 3710 8-PA if you need assistance.
2. Access the FTSETUP Function Selection Menu as
described in "Displaying the FTSETUP Function
Selection Menu" on page C-6.
e-8
3. Enter a 3 or a C. FTSETUP displays:
Creating a configuration file.
Answer each question or press
Enter to accept the default.
4. The prompts on the configuration worksheet appear,
one at a time.
Note: Some of the prompts will be
skipped, depending on the response
to a previous prompt.
Type your response to each prompt based on the
completed configuration worksheet. You can use
uppercase or lowercase letters. The prompts are
explained in "Using the Configuration Worksheet" on
page C-13. You can also get online help with each
prompt by pressing Alt-Fl when the prompt appears.
If you enter an incorrect response, press the Enter key
to skip through the rest of the prompts until the
message in step 5 appears. Then enter a Y. The
prompts begin again.
You can save time if the default response
(in brackets [ ]) is correct. Press the Enter key to
accept the default response.
5. Check your entries when FTSETUP displays:
Would you like to change any of the
above entries? [N]:
Do one of the following:
•
If you entered all the responses correctly, enter an
N or press the Enter key to proceed with creating
the configuration file.
•
If you made a mistake, enter a Y. FTSETUP
repeats the entire set of prompts.
C-9
6. After you enter an N or press the Enter key,
FTSETUP displays:
Would ydu like to define any auto-dial
sequences? [N]:
Do one of the following:
•
If you are not using a modem or you do not want to
define any auto-dial sequences, enter an N or press
the Enter key to proceed with creating the
configuration file.
•
If you are using a modem and you want to define
auto-dial sequences, enter a Y. See "Defining
Auto-Dial Sequences" on page C-24 for more
information.
7. After you enter an N or press the Enter key, or after
you finish defining auto-dial sequences, FTSETUP
displays:
Do you wish to modify any key definitions? [N]:
Do one of the following:
•
If you want to use the default keyboard definition,
which is shown in Figure C-5 on page C-32, enter
an N or press the Enter key to proceed with
creating the configuration file.
•
If you want to change the default keyboard
definition, enter a Y. See "Defining the Keyboard"
on page C-30 for more information.
When you enter an N or press the Enter key, or when
you finish modifying the keyboard definition,
FTSETUP displays:
To save configuration values enter filename (or press
Enter to return to Function Selection Menu) :
C-IO
If you decide not to create the configuration file, press
the Enter key at the filename prompt without typing a
file name. FTSETUP displays:
Okay to lose changes? (Y=Yes N=No)
[N]
Enter a Y to abandon your responses. FTSETUP does
not create the file. It displays the Function Selection
Menu.
8. Type the name that you want to use for the
configuration file and press the Enter key.
Note: The extension SET is
recommended but not required for
configuration filenames.
If there is already a file with the name you enter,
FTSETUP displays:
An old file by that name exists.
Erase the old file? (Y=Yes N=No)
[N]
Do one of the following:
•
If you do not want to erase the old file, enter an N
or press the Enter key. FTSETUP repeats the
filename prompt.
•
If you want to'replace the old file with the new file,
enter a Y. FTSETUP creates the new file and
displays the Function Selection Menu.
After FTSETUP creates the configuration file, it
returns to the Function Selection Menu.
9. Exit from FTSETUP by entering a 4'on the Function
Selection Menu. The DOS system prompt appears.
C-ll
If you have not selected a default configuration file as
instructed in "Preparing and Selecting a Default
Configuration File" on page 2-17, you can perform that
procedure next. See "Selecting a Default Configuration
File" on page C-41 for specific instructions.
You can also load the new configuration file, as described
in "Loading a Configuration File" on page 3-18.
If an error message appears when you try to select or load
the configuration file. See Appendix A, "File Transfer
Messages," for an explanation of the message.
Modifying an Existing
Configuration File
Follow these steps to modify an existing configuration
file.
Note: The modified file can replace
the existing file (by keeping the _same
filename), or it can be saved as a new
file leaving the original file unchanged
(by using a new filename).
1. Access the FTSETUP Function Selection Menu as
described in "Displaying the FTSETUP Function
Selection Menu" on page C-6.
2. Enter a 2 or an M. FTSETUP displays:
Enter filename (or press Enter to return
to Function Selection Menu) :
3. Type the name of the file to be modified and press the
Enter key.
C-12
4. Beginning at this step, modifying a configuration file
is identical to creating a configuration file, with the
following exceptions:
•
The default values for the prompts are obtained
from the file being modified.
•
In addition to prompts that are skipped because of
a previous response, some prompts may be skipped
if they have been suppressed. This is true for the
sample configuration files that came with FTTERM
and may be true for files created for you by a
system administrator. See "Suppressing Selected
Prompts" on page C-43.
See "Creating a Configuration File" on page C-8 for
the additional steps.
If you want to save the modifications as a new
configuration file without changing or deleting the old
file, enter a new filename at the prompt:
To save configuration values enter filename
Using the Configuration
Worksheet
The configuration worksheet (Figure C-2) lists the
prompts for creating or modifying a configuration file.
The Default column shows the default value for the
prompt when you create a new configuration file. When
you Inodify a configuration file, the default value is the
current value in the file being modified.
See the sections that follow the configuration worksheet
for more information about each prompt.
C-13
Prompt
Options
Default
Running in
protocol
conversion
mode?
Y,N
Y
Protocol
converter?
1 (3708 or
37108-PA)
2 Reserved
1
line speed
(baud rate) to
be used?
110,150,
300,600,
1200,2400,
4800, 9600
1200
Half duplex?
Y,N
N
Parity?
1
2
3
4
1
Stop bits?
1,2
1
Automatic
new line?
Y,N
N
Automatic line
feed?
Y,N
N
Carriage
return?
Y (CR)
N (CR-LF)
Y
Character
sent at end of
message?
1 (ETX)
2 (CR)
3 (EOT)
4 (XOFF)
2
Scrolling?
Y,N
Y
Prompt
character
from host?
See text
°
START/STOP
(XON/XOFF)
enabled?
Y,N
N
Figure
C-14
(Odd)
(Even)
(Mark)
(Space)
C-2 (Part 1 of 3).
Response
Configuration Worksheet
Prompt
Options
Default
Communication
port?
1,2
1
25 line
terminal
defi nition in
3708 or 3710
8-PA?
Y,N
Y
Host system?
1 (MVS/TSO)
2 (VM/CMS)
3 (CICS)
4 (IWS)
2
Inactivity
timeout in
minutes?
1-9
3
Extended
code for
switch to
PC-DOS
session?
See text
112
Extended
code for
switch to host
session?
See text
113
Extended
code for
switch to file
transfer
menu?
See text
111
Extended
code for
switch to
messages
screen?
See text
110
Figure
C-2 (Part 2 of 3).
Response
Configuration Worksheet
C-15
Response
Prompt
Options
Default
Name of host
fi I e transfer
command?
See text
IND$FILE
Would you like
to change any
of the above
entries?
Y,N
N
See
text
Would you like
to define any
auto-dial
sequences?
Y,N
N
See
text
Do you wish to
modify any
key
definitions?
Y,N
N
See
text
Figure
C-2 (Part 3 of 3).
Configuration Worksheet
Running in Protocol Conversion
Mode?
This item determines whether FTTERM performs file
transfers using the protocol conversion method or the
native emulation method.
Enter a Y to perform file transfers with an SNA host
through a 3708 or 3710 8-PA operating in protocol
conversion mode. FTTERM will display the File Transfer
Main Menu for protocol conversion (Figure B-1 on
page B-3).
Enter an N if you are communicating with an ASCII host
or with a SNA host that does not have the required host
file transfer program. You can also respond N with any
host if you only want basic 3101 emulation functions and
the relatively limited file transfer capabilities of the
native emulation method. FTTERM will display the File
Transfer Main Menu - Native Emulation (Figure B-2 on
page B-9).
C-16
Protocol Converter?
This item identifies the type of protocol conversion device
to which the PC is connected. The prompt appears only
when you respond Y to "Running in Protocol Conversion
Mode?"
Enter a 1 for a 3708 or 3710 8-P A. 2 is reserved for future
use.
Line Speed (Baud Rate) to be Used?
This item determines the line speed (baud rate) for the
communication line. The valid line speeds are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600.
The line speed you select must match the line speed
configured for the port at the host, 3708, or 3710 8-PA..
The maximum line speed supported by FTTERM is 9600.
This is the preferred line speed when you are directly
connected to the host, 3708, or 3710 8-P A. If you are using
a modem, the line speed will probably be 2400 or less.
Note: The maximum line speed for the
3270 PC, 3270 PC AT, and the PC
Convertible is 4800.
Half Duplex?
FTTERM supports both full duplex and half duplex modes
of operation.
C-li
In full duplex mode, both devices can communicate
simultaneously. Characters that you type during a host
session are sent back to the PC display. If you are using
a 3708 or 3710-8PA in protocol conversion mode, select full
duplex by "entering an N.
If each character that you type appears twice, change this
to Y for half duplex mode.
When you are using a modem, the modem must be
configured for full duplex operation regardless of the
selection in the configuration file.
Parity?
Parity provides a means of checking the accuracy of
transmitted data. The parity options are:
•
•
•
•
1 (Odd)
2 (Even)
3 (Mark, parity bit held to 1)
4 (Space, parity bit held to 0).
The default value is 1 (odd parity). Yours election must
match the parity setting for the ASCII host, 3"70S:
3710
8-PA.
or
Stop Bits?
Stop bits signify the end of a transmitted character.
Select one or two stop bits. One stop bit is normal for line
speeds higher than 110.
Automatic New Line?
This prompt appears only when you respond N to
"Running in Protocol Conversion Mode?"
C-18
Enter a Y to let the PC cursor move to the next line when
text from the host passes column 80. Enter an N to make
the cursor overwrite the same line.
Automatic Line Feed?
Enter a Y to let the PC cursor move to column 1 of the
next line when you press the Enter key during a host
session. Enter an N to make the cursor move to column 1
of the same line.
Carriage Return?
This item determines what character(s) the PC sends to
the host when you press the Enter key. Enter a Y to send
a carriage return character (CR). Enter an N to send a
carriage return and a line feed character (CR LF).
Consult your system administrator at the host if you do
not know how to respond. When in doubt, enter an N.
Character Sent
a~
End
~f
Message?
This item identifies the character that FTTERM sends to
the host at the end of each line during a TRANSMIT
operation (native emulation only). Valid responses are:
•
•
•
•
1 (ETX)
2 (CR)
3 (EOT)
4 (XOFF).
Scrolling?
Enter a Y to make the displayed text move up one line
when a line feed occurs with the cursor on the bottom
line. The top line of text scrolls off the screen. Enter an
N to make the cursor move to the upper-right corner and
overwrite the current text display.
C-19
Prompt Character From Host?
Some hosts send a prompt character to the PC when they
are ready to process the next line of input. This is a
method of pacing the input.
If the character is a non-numeric displayable character,
enter that character.
If the prompt character is numeric or non-displayable,
enter the ASCII code for that character in decimal. For
example, enter 49 if the prompt character is 1.
If the host does not send a prompt character, enter O.
Start/Stop (XON/XOFF) Enabled?
Enter a Y if the ASCII Host, 3708 Protocol Converter, or
3710 Protocol Converter uses the XON/XOFF method of
stopping and restarting transmission (using the ASCII
codes DCl and DC3). If the host uses XON/XOFF, the PC
can send the XOFF character when the host is sending
, more data than the PC can process at the time, preventing
the loss of data.
Enter an N if the host does not use the XON/XOFF
method.
Communications Port?
Enter a 1 if the communication line is connected to the
PC's primary Asynchronous Communications Adapter
(COMl). Enter a 2 if the line is connected to a secondary
Asynchronous Communications Adapter (COM2).
C-20
25 Line Terminal Definition in 3708 or
37108-PA?
This prompt appears only when you respond Y to
"Running in Protocol Conversion Mode?"
Enter a Y if the 3708 or 3710 8-PA offers a terminal
selection (such as IBM PC/FTTERM COLOR or IBM
PC/FTTERM MONO) that provides a host status line on
the PC display's bottom line. Enter an N if such a
terminal selection is not available.
Host System?
This prompt appears only when you respond Y to
"Running in Protocol Conversion Mode?"
Entera number from the following list that identifies the
type of SNA host that you intend to contact when using
this configuration file:
•
•
1 (MVS/TSO)
2 (VM/CMS)
•
3 (CICS)
•
4 (IWS).
Inactivity Timeout (in Minutes)?
This prompt appears only when you respond Y to
"Running in Protocol Conversion Mode?"
Enter the number of minutes that FTTERM should wait
for a response from the host before terminating a file
transfer using the protocol conversion method.
Three minutes is considered reasonable. Use a higher
number if you get frequent error messages with the
identifier TRANSIO. Valid responses are the digits 1
through 9.
C-21
Extended Code for Switch to xxxx?
These four items determine the key sequences for
switching between these FTTERM functions:
•
•
•
•
PC-DOS session (Default is 112 = Alt-F9)
Host session (Default is 113 = Alt-F10)
File transfer menu (Default is 111 = Alt-FS)
Host messages screen (Default is 110 = Alt-F7).
You can change the session switching keys if they conflict
with keys defined by a PC program running concurrently
with FTTERM. Figure C-3 lists the scan codes you can
enter in response to this prompt.
Scan Code
Key
84 - 93
Shift F1 through Shift F10
94 - 103
Ctrl F1 through Ctrl F10
106
Alt F3
110-113
Alt F7 through Alt F10
114
Ctrl PrtSc
115
Ctrl Cursor left
116
Ctrl Cursor right
117
Ctrl End
118
Ctrl PgOn
119
Ctrl Home
120-131
Alt 1 through Alt 0, Alt -, Alt
132
Ctrl PgUp
Figure
C-3.
=
Extended Codes Available as Key Sequences for
Session Switching
You can change any of the default values. For example, if
you want Shift-F9 to be the key sequence for switching to
a host session, enter .92 at the appropriate prompt.
C-22
Notes:
1. You can assign the same value to the PC DOS session
switch and the host session switch. Doing so lets you
toggle between the sessions with the same key
sequence. This is the only pair of functions that you
can assign this way.
2. The prompt "Extended Code for Switch to Messages
Screen?" appears only when you respond Y to
"Running in Protocol Conversion Mode?"
3. The values you select for the session switches will be
in effect during a concurrent PC DOS session. Be
aware that if a PC program uses the same keys for its
own functions, FTTERM will override the PC
functions.
Name of Host File Transfer
Command?
This prompt appears only when you respond Y to
"Running in Protocol Conversion Mode?"
Enter the name of the host file transfer program that
FTTERM uses when transferring files with the protocol
conversion method. The default name is IND$FILE. If
the host system administrator has assigned a name other
than IND$FILE to the host file transfer program, enter
that name at this prompt.
Would Y ou Like to Change any of
the Above Entries?
Enter a Y if you have made a mistake in any previous
response. FTSETUP displays the prolnpts again. Enter
an N when the responses are correct and you are ready to
proceed.
C-23
Would You Like to Define any
Auto-pial Sequences?
Enter an N if you are not using a modem or you do not
want to define any auto-dial sequences. Enter a Y if you
are using a modem and you want to define auto-dial
sequences. See "Defining Auto-Dial Sequences" for more
information.
Would You Like to Modify any Key
Definitions?
Enter an N if you want to use the default or previously
defined keyboard definition. Enter a Y to modify the
keyboard definition. See "Defining the Keyboard" on
page C-30 for more information.
Defining Auto-Dial Sequences
This section describes how to define auto-dial sequences
for your modem. FTSETUP lets you define up to nine
auto-dial sequences, along with the names of the contacts,
in each configuration file.
FTTERM displays the list of contact names (or other
descriptions you choose to use) in the Auto-Dial Directory
(see page 3-9). The Auto-Dial Directory appears when you
press the key sequence for the host session (default is
Alt-FIO) and there is currently no contact with a host.
FTTERM displays the directory only if you have defined
auto-dial sequences in the configuration file that is
currently in effect.
C-2-!
Displaying the Auto-Dial Definition
Menu
When you create or modify a configuration file, this
prompt appears:
Would you like to define any auto-dial
sequences? [N):
Enter a Y to display the Auto-Dial Definition Menu:
AUTO-DIAL DEFINITION MENU
!Q
Description
1
2
3
4
5
ADD an auto-dial definition
CHANGE an auto-dial definition
DELETE an auto-dial definition
LIST all auto-dial definitions
QUIT definition editing
Type an 10 number or the first letter of the command and press ENTER.
===>
Alt-F1 = HELP
Figure
C-4.
The Auto-Dial Definition Menu
C-25
Adding an Auto-Dial Definition
This section uses an example to show how to add an
auto-dial definition. The following procedure adds an
auto-dial definition for the host "IBM Information
Network":
1. Enter a 1 or an A on the Auto-Dial Definition Menu.
FTSETUP displays:
AUTO-DIAL DIRECTORY
ID
NAME
AUTO-DIAL SEQUENCE
1
TSO HOST
ATDT3333
Type name (maximum 2S chars) or press Enter
to return.
===>
To return to the Auto-Dial Definition Menu without
adding an auto-dial definition, press the Enter key
without typing a contact name.
2. Type the contact name. In this example, you type IBM
INFORMATION NETWORK. Then press the Enter
key. FTSETUP displays:
Type modem command followed by telephone number
(maximum 3S chars) then press
,+, ON RIGHT OF KEYBOARD. Use
,_, ON RIGHT OF KEYBOARD to correct errors.
===>
C-26
3. Type a maximum of 35 characters for the dialing
sequence. In this example, you type ATDT9,1,2345678
7
8,
9
flam?
t
Pg Up
';'.1, .........:~-+--+--t
t
',,;"
4 / ,',' 5 ,~."'O: 6
,:>
',
...
....... ,
PrtSc
•
1
2
End
3
~
+
ligOn
o
1m
_ Del
If you make a typing error, press the Minus key (-) at
the far right of the keyboard to backspace. When you
are finished typing the entry, press the Plus key (+) at
the far right of the keyboard. FTSETUP uses the Plus
and Minus keys this way to let you include the
Backspace and Enter keys within the dialing sequence.
When you press the Plus key, FTSETUP displays:
AUTO-DIAL DIRECTORY
ID
NAME
AUTO-DIAL SEQUENCE
1
2
TSO HOST
IBM INFORMATION NETWORK
ATDT3333
ATDT9,1,2345678
Type name (maximum 25 chars) or press ENTER
to return.
===)
In this example, the first two auto-dial definitions were
,previously added to the configuration file.
C-27
4. Press the Enter key to return to the Auto-Dial
Definition Menu. The definition is added to the
configu.ration file.
Changing an Auto-Dial Definition
This section uses an example to show how to change the
name or dialing sequence associated with an ID number
on the Auto-Dial Directory. The following procedure
changes the dialing sequence for the TSO host:
1.
Enter a 2 or a C on the Auto-Dial Definition IVIenu.
FTSETUP displays:
AUTO-DIAL DIRECTORY
ID
NAME
AUTO-DIAL SEQUENCE
1
2
TSO HOST
IBM INFORMATION NETWORK
ATDT3333
ATDT9,1,2345678
Change definition for which ID?
(press Enter to return):
To return to the Auto-Dial Definition Menu· without changing an auto-dial definition, press the Enter key
without typing an ID number.
2. Enter a 1 to change the auto-dIal definition for the
TSO host. FTSETUP displays:
To keep current entry press Enter, or use
cursor left key to delete current definition,
then type new definition and press Enter.
===> TSO HOST
3. In this example, you press the Enter key to leave the
name as it is. FTSETUP displays:
Type modem command followed by telephone number
(maximum 35 chars) then press
'+' ON RIGHT OF KEYBOARD.
Use
'-' ON RIGHT OF KEYBOARD to correct errors.
===> ATDT3333
C-28
4. Use the Minus key to delete all or part of the current
dialing sequence. Then type the new dialing sequence,
for example, ATDT4444. Then press the Plus key.
FTSETUP displays the modified Auto-Dial Directory.
5. Press the Enter key to return to the Auto-Dial
Definition Menu.
Deleting an Auto-Dial Definition
This section uses an example to show how to delete an
auto-dial definition from a configuration file. The
following procedure deletes the auto-dial definition for the
VM host:
1. Enter a 3 or a D on the Auto-Dial Definition l\Ienu.
FTSETUP displays:
~UTO-DIAL
DI~ECTORY
SEQ~E~CE
ID
NAME
AUTO-DIAL
1
2
VM HOST
IBM INFORMATION NETWORK
ATD~~,~,23456?8
ATDT9,5554321
Delete definition for which ID?
(press Enter to return):
To return to the Auto-Dial Definition Menu without
deleting an auto-dial definition, press the Enter key
without typing an ID number.
2. Enter a 1 to delete the auto-dial definition for the VM
host. FTSETUP displays:
Vr-1 HOST
.Z\re you sure you want to delete?
(Y=Yes
~=Xo)
[N]:
If you decide not to delete the auto-dial definition~
enter an N or press the Enter key to redisplay the
unchanged Auto-Dial Directory.
C-29
· 3. Enter a Y to confirm the deletion. FTSETUP displays
the updated Auto-Dial Directory.
4. Press the Enter key again to return to the Auto-Dial
Definition Menu.
Listing the Auto-Dial Definitions
Enter a 4 or an L on the Auto-Dial Definition Menu to
list the auto-dial definitions that are currently defined in
a configuration file. The listing function does not let you
add, change, or delete any auto-dial definitions.
Press the Enter key to return to the Auto-Dial Definition
Menu.
Quitting the Auto-Dial Definition
Procedure
Enter a 5 or a Q on the Auto-Dial Definition Menu to quit
defining auto-dial definitions and to continue creating or
modifying the configuration file. You return to the
configuration file prompts. FTSETUP displays:
Do you wish to modify any key definitions? [N]:
Defining the Keyboard
This section describes how FTTERM defines PC keys as
substitutes for 3101 and 3270 keys that are not on the PC
keyboard. It also describes how to use FTSETUP to
modify a default keyboard definition to suit your needs.
C-30
Default Keyboard Definitions
The sample configuration files that came with FTTERM
contain two different keyboard definitions:
•
A 3101-like keyboard definition, which is shown in
Figure C-5 on page C-32. It provides 3101 keyboard
functions for communicating with ASCII hosts. The
3101-like keyboard definition is contained in these
sample files:
-
DOWJONES.SET
SOURCE.SET.
The 3101-like keyboard also results when you respond
N to the prompt "Do you wish to modify any key
definitions?" when creating a new configuration file.
•
A 3270-like keyboard definition is shown in Figure C-6
on page C-33. It provides additional 3270 key board
functions for communicating with SNA hosts through
a 3708 or 3710 8-PA. It also contains key definitions
that control 3708 and 3710 8-PA functions. The
3270-like keyboard definition is contained in this
sample file:
-
IBM3708.SET.
C-31
3101 Key
PC Key
Backspace
BREAK
CLEAR
Down Cursor
DEL
ERASE EOLlEOF
ERASE EOS
ERASE INPUT
ESC
HOME
(Alt Backtab)
Left Cursor
LINE FEED
New Line
PF1 through PF10
PRINT
Right Cursor
Tab
Up Cursor
Backspace
PgUp
Home
Cursor Down
Del
End
PgDn
Ctrl Home
Esc
Ctrl PgUp
Figure
C-5.
Cursor Left
Ctrl Enter
Enter
F1 through F10
Shift PrtSc
Cursor Right
Tab
Cursor Up
3101 and PC Key Definition Chart (Default
Definition)
See Appendix D, "Sample Configuration Files" for
additional information on the keyboard definition for
DOWJONES.SET and SOURCE.SET;
3270 Key
ATTN
Backtab
PC Key
Ctrl a
Backtab
or Esc Tab
CLEAR
Home or Ctrl c
CURSR SEL Esc k
Delete
Del
DEV CNCL
Ctrl x
Down Cursor Down Cursor
DUP
Ctrl d
Enter
Enter
ERASE EOF End
ERASE
Ctrl Home
INPUT
FIELD MARK Ctrl f
HOME
Ctrl PgUp
or Esc h
IDENT
Esc z
Insert mode Ins
or Esc Del
Left Cursor
Left Cursor
New line
Ctrl Enter
or Ctrl j
Null/Blank
Esc n
Ctrl F1 or Esc,
PA1
Ctrl F2 or Esc.
PA2
Ctrl F3 or Esc /
PA3
F1 or Esc 1
PF1
PF2
F2 or Esc 2
F3 or Esc 3
PF3
F4 or Esc 4
PF4
PF5
F5 or Esc 5
F6 or Esc 6
PF6
F7 or Esc 7
PF7
PF8
F8 or Esc 8
F9 or Esc 9
PF9
PF10
F10 or Esc 0
Figure
C-6.
3270 Key
PC Key
PF11
PF12
PF13
PF14
PF15
PF16
PF17
PF18
PF19
PF20
PF21
PF22
PF23
PF24
Alt-F7
Alt-F8
Alt-F9
Alt-F10
Print
Refresh
RESET
Resume
Display
Resume
Printer
Right Cursor
Status On/Off
Suspend
Display
Suspend
Printer
SYS REO
Tab
Type Ahead
Up Cursor
Shift F1 or Esc Shift F2 or Esc =
Shift F3 or Esc!
Shift F4 or Esc @
Shift F5 or Esc #
Shift F6 or Esc $
Shift F7 or Esc %
Shift F8 or Esc 1\
Shift F9 or Esc &
Shift F10 or Esc *
Alt F1 or Esc (
Alt F2 or Esc)
Alt F3 or Esc Alt F4 or Esc +
switch to Msgs
Switch to FTIERM
Switch to PC DOS
Switch to Host
Ctrl p
Esc r
Ctrl r
Ctrl y
Esc p
Hight_Cursor
Ctrl w
Ctrl t
Esc
0
Esc s
Tab
Esc t
Up Cursor
3270 and PC Key Definition Chart (IBM3708.SET)
See Appendix D, "Sample Configuration Files" for
additional information on the keyboard definition for
IBM3.708.SET.
C-33
Displaying the Key Definition Menu
When you ,create or modify a configuration file, this
prompt appears:
Do you wish to modify any key definitions?
[N]:
Enter a Y to display the Key Definition Menu
(Figure C-7):
KEY DEFINITION MENU
ill
Description
1
2
3
4
5
ADD a key definition
DELETE a key definition
FIND a key definition
LIST all key definitions
QUIT definition editing
Type an 10 number or the first letter of the command and press ENTER.
===>
Alt-F1
Figure
= HELP
C-7.
The Key Definition Menu
Note: To modify a key definition, you
use the ADD option.
Redefinable Keys
Figure C-8 lists the PC keys and key sequences that you
can define using the Key Definition Menu.
C-34
F1 through F12
Alt F1 through Alt F10
Ctrl F1 through Ctrl F10
Shift F1 through Shift F10
Ait a through Alt z
Ctrl a through Ctrl z
Ait 0 through Alt 9
Ctrl 0 through Ctrl 9
Backspace
Ctrl Backspace
Enter
Ctrl Enter
Ins
PrtSc
Del
Esc
Up Cursor
Down Cursor
Left Cursor
Ctrl Left Cursor
Figure
C-S.
Right Cursor
Ctrl Right Cursor
Tab
Reverse Tab
End
Ctrl End
Home
Ctrl Home
PgUp
Ctrl PgUp
PgDn
Ctrl PgDn
Ctrl 1\
Ctrl [
Ctrl J
Ctrl \
Ctrl _
Ctrl @
+ on numeric keypad
Redefinable PC Keys
Note: You cannot change the
definition of a standard letter or number
key. You must use it in a combination
with Alt or Ctrl.
Adding or Modifying a Key Definition
This section uses an example to show how to add or
modify a key definition. The following procedure defines
the F6 key as a host logon function:
1. At the Key Definition Menu, enter a 1 or an A.
FTSETUP displays:
Add definition for which key?
(press lei to cancel):
To quit without adding a definition, press C.
C-35
2. Press the F6 key. FTSETUP displays:
<F6>
Type de·finition sequence then press
'+' ON RIGHT OF KEYBOARD.
Use
'-' ON RIGHT OF KEYBOARD to correct errors.
3. Enter the logon sequence, for example, LOGON
USERID
You can include the Enter keystroke as part of the
definition.
9
PgUp
-
+
If you make a typing error, press the Minus key (-) at
the far right of the keyboard to backspace .. When you
are finished typing the entry, press the Plus key (+) at
the far right of the keyboard. FTSETUP uses the Plus
and Minus keys this way to let you include the
Backspace and Enter keys within the key definition.
When you press the Plus key, FTSETUP displays:
<F6> produces: LOGON USERID
Add definition for which key?
(press 'e' to cancel):
C-36
4. You can continue adding key definitions or press C to
return to the Key Definition Menu.
Notes:
1. You cannot add a definition to a standard letter or
number key. Figure C-8 on page C-35 lists the
redefinable keys.
2. Key definitions cannot be nested.
Using the Wait Function in Key
Definitions
The wait function causes FTTERM to wait until a
specified character is received from the host.
For example, you can define a string that makes FTTERl\1
wait until the host sends a < BEL> character (ASCII
Ctrl-G) before it sends the rest of the string.
The procedure for this example is:
1. When adding the key definition, at the -point-where the
Wait should occur, press Alt-W.
2. Type the character that you want FTTERM to wait
for. It can be any single character, or a Ctrl-character
combination. In this example, press Ctrl-G.
3. Continue typing the remainder of the key definition.
When you use this key during a host session, FTTERM
transmits the first part of the definition and pauses.
While it is waiting, FTTERM displays:
*** Waiting. Press Alt-FlO to cancel. ***
When the host sends Ctrl-G, _FTTERM sends the rest of
the key definition and returns to normal operation.
You can cancel the Wait function by pressing Alt-FIO.
C-37
Deleting a Key Definition
This section uses an example to show how to delete a key
definition .. Do this when you want to return the key to its
standard definition or if you run out of space in
FTTERM's key definition table.
The following procedure deletes the logon sequence
definition for the F6 key:
1.
Enter a 2 or a D at the Key Definition Menu.
FTSETUP displays:
Delete definition for which key
(press 'e' to cancel)?
To quit without deleting a key definition, type a C.
2. Press the F6 key. FTSETUP displays:
<F6> produces:
LOGON USERID
Are you sure you want to delete? (Y=Yes
N=~o):
If you change your mind about deleting the definition,
enter an N. FTSETUP displays:
<F6> produces:
LOGON
Delete definition for which key
(press 'e' to cancel)?
Press C to return to the Key Definition lVlenu.
3. Enter a Y to confirm the deletion. FTSETUP displays:
<F6> produces
i~s
standard definition: <PF6>
Delete defini~ion for which key
(press 'e' ~o cancel)?
C-38
4. You can continue to delete definitions or press C to
return to the Key Definition Menu. F6 returns to its
standard definition of PF6. Figure C-5 on page C-32
shows the standard definitions for selected keys; the
remainder of the redefinable keys have NO-OP (for no
operation) as their standard definitions.
Note: You cannot delete the definition
of a standard letter or number key.
Finding a Key Definition
This section uses an example to show how to find the
current definition of a key. The following procedure finds
the definition of Alt-FIO:
1. Enter a 3 or an F on the Key Definition 1'Ienu.
FTSETUP displays:
Find definition for which key
(Press that ~ey, or press leI to cancel)?
To quit without finding any key definitions, type a C.
2. Press and hold the Alt key and press the FlO key.
FTSETUP displays:
<~lt-=10>
produces its standard definition:
<S\oJitch to HOST>
:ind definition for which key
(P~ess that key, or press leI
to
cance~)?
3. You can continue finding key definitions or press C to
return to the Key Definition Menu.
C-39
Listing the Key Definitions
The following section describes how to display a list of
the current" definitions for all the currently defined keys.
1. Enter a 4 or an L on the Key Definition Menu.
FTSETUP lists all of the key definitions in the
configuration file. It lists the default definitions plus
any user defined definitions that have been added to
the configuration file.
Any key definition that differs from the standard
definition shown in Figure C-5 on page C-32 appears
wi th (U) preceding it.
2. If all of the key definitions do not fit on one screen,
press the Enter key to see more of the definitions.
At the end of the key definition list, FTSETUP
displays:
Press Enter to return:
3. Press the Enter Key to return to the Key Definition
Menu.
Quitting the Key Definition
Procedure
Enter a 5 on the Key Definition Menu to continue
creating or modifying the configuration file. FTSETUP
displays:
To save configuration values enter filename (or
press Enter to return to Function Selection Menu) :
You return to the configuration file prompts.
C-40
Selecting a Default Configuration
File
You can select the configuration file that you use most
often to be the default configuration file. You must select
a default configuration file before you can use FTTERM,
unless you have been provided with a preconfigured
FTTERM program diskette.
The default configuration file automatically takes effect
the next time you load PC DOS and start FTTERM. It
stays in effect until you load a different configuration file
as described in "Loading a Configuration File" on
page 3-1B. You can select a different default
configuration file as often as you want.
Follow these steps to select a default configuration file:
1. Access the FTSETUP Function Selection Menu as
described in "Displaying the FTSETUP Function
Selection Menu" on page C-6.
2. - Enter a 1 or an S. FTSETUP displays:. _. _.
Enter filename (or press Enter to return
to Function Selection Menu) :
To quit without selecting a new default file, press the
Enter key.
3. Type the name of the configuration file you want to
select, including the drive letter and path, if
a ppropria teo
C-41
4. Press the Enter key. FTSETUP displays:
Selection of configuration options complete.
FTSETUP automatically exits to PC DOS.
Note: If FTTERM is already started
when you do this procedure, the new
default configuration does not take
effect un til the next time you start
FTTERM.
If you want the configuration file to
take effect immediately, you can use the
LOAD option on the file transfer menu.
See "Loading a Configuration File" on
page 3-18. Load the file named
DEFAULT.SET.
When you modify a file that has been
selected as the default configuration,
you must select it again after modifying
it. This is not the case if you modify
DEFAULT.SET directly.
FTSETUP copies the configuration file you select into a
special file named DEFAULT.SET. At startup, FTTERM
accesses the DEFAULT.SET file, not the configuration
file. Therefore, it is not essential that the configuration
file is always present when you start FTTERM. It is
essential, however, that DEFAULT.SET is present in the
same disk and directory with the FTTERM program file
(FTTERM.EXE).
C-42
Suppressing Selected Prompts
This information is for advanced users and system
administrators who are creating configuration files for
FTTERM users.
You can edit a configuration file so that FTSETUP
displays only selected prompts when users modify the file.
This avoids the possibility of unintended changes to the
file. It also reduces the number of steps when modifying
the file.
Using a text editor or debugging program, change the
semicolon (;) that appears in a prompt line to an asterisk
(*). For example, to suppress the "Character Sent at End
of Message?" prompt, change the line from:
2 ; Character Sent at End of Message
to
2
* Character Sent at End of Message
FTSETUP Messages
This section describes the messages that can appear while
you are running FTSETUP. Each message includes an
explanation and a recommended response.
Cannot delete standard definition of < keyname >
You tried to delete the standard definition of a
special key such as Tab or Pg Up. You can add a new
definition to these keys and delete the new definition,
but you cannot delete the standard definition.
C-43
Cannot delete standard definition of an ordinary
character, such as 'x'
You tried to delete the definition of a standard letter,
number, or punctuation character. These definitions
cannot be deleted or changed.
Check your entry and try the procedure again.
Data not in correct format in file
You tried to select a default configuration file that
contains invalid data.
Create the file again or restore it from a backup
copy.
Definition table full
You defined as many keys as the definition table can
hold. The total characters in all key definitions
cannot exceed 512.
You must delete or shorten the definitions of
currently defined keys before you can add new
definitions.
Diskette full
The disk to which you are saving a new
configuration file is full. It is also possible that the
disk is damaged.
Delete unneeded files or repeat the operation with a
different diskette.
C-44
File not found
FTSETUP could not find the configuration file you
want to modify or delete. Check your entries and try
agaIn.
Not a valid filename
You made an error while entering a PC filename.
Check your typing. The restrictions on filenames
appear in the IBM PC DOS Reference manual.
Please type a modem command and telephone
number.
You have selected to change an auto-dial definition
and have not entered any data at the prompt before
pressing carriage return.
Enter your new auto-dial definition.
Please type a name.
You have selected to change an auto-dial definition
and have not entered any data at the prompt before
pressing carriage return.
Enter your new auto-dial definition.
The auto-dial directory is empty. Change (Delete)
canceled.
You tried to change, delete, or list an entry in the
auto-dial directory, but there are currently no entries
in the directory for this configuration file. ~o
response is needed.
The auto-dial directory is full. Add canceled.
You tried to add an entry to the auto-dial directory,
but there are already nine entries in the directory.
Delete unneeded auto-dial definitions or create a new
configuration file.
'x' is an ordinary character. Only special keys (Ctrl-,
Alt-, FI-FI2, CURSOR keys, etc.) can be given new
meanings.
The key that you specified can be defined only when
used with Alt or Ctrl. See Figure C-8 on page C-35
for a list of redefinable keys.
C-46
Appendix D. Sample
Configuration Files
About this Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Understanding the Sample Configuration Files . D-4
IBM3708.SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
DOWJONES.SET (Dow Jones News Service) ... D-IO
SOURCE.SET (The Source) ................ D-12
D-l
Notes:
D-2
About this Appendix
This appendix describes the sample configuration files
that come with FTTERM. If you have received a
preconfigured FTTERrvf working diskette (from a system
administrator, for example), the selection and contents of
configuration files may be different.
The following sample configuration files are supplied with
FTTERM:
•
IBM3708.SET for all SNA hosts using a 3708 or 3710
8-PA
•
DOWJONES.SET for the Dow Jones News Service 1
•
SOURCE.SET for The Source 2 online information
service.
The usefulness of the sample files depends on the
requirements of the host. See the section on the
particular file for a list of the items most likely to need
modification.
To modify a sample file, see Appendix C, "Creating and
Modifying Configuration Files."
Dow Jones News Service is a Registered trademark of Dow Jones &
Company. Inc.
THE SOURCE is a service mark of Source Telecomputing
Corporation, a subsidiary of The Reader's Digest Association, Inc.
D-3
Understanding the Sample
Configuration Files
Each section of this appendix includes two parts:
•
A listing of the configuration as it exists on the
FTTERM program disk. The format of a line in a
configuration file is as follows:
Current value
; or * prompt
A semicolon (;) indicates that the prompt should be
displayed when a user modifies the file with
FTSETUP. An asterisk (*) indicates that the prompt
should be suppressed. (Suppressing a prompt simplifies
the modification procedure and reduces the risk of
unintended changes to the file. See "Suppressing
Selected Prompts" on page C-43.)
•
A table of key definitions. If the basic set of key
definitions has been added to, the additional key
. definitions appear as a numeric table in the-configuration file. The only sample file with
additional key definitions is IBM3708.SET.
Note: You should not modify a
configuration file with a text editor
except to suppress prompts. Do not
\. modify the prompts. Use FTSETUP to
modify the configuration values.
D-4
IBM3708.SET
The IBM3708.SET file is for use with SNA hosts
connected to the PC by way of a 3708 or 3710 8-P A.
It provides for file transfers in protocol conversion mode.
It contains additional key definitions to support 3270
keyboard functions.
The items in IBM3708.SET that are most likely to need
modification are:
•
•
•
•
•
Line speed
Full or half duplex
Parity
Stop bits
Host system.
This information can be obtained from the system
administrator for the 3708 or 3710 8-PA.
Figure D-1 on page D-6 shows the standard configuration
for IBM3708.SET. Figure D-2 on page D-7 lists the
special 3270 key definitions. Figure D-3 on page D-9
highlights the special keys.
D-5
V;Running in protocol conversion mode? (V = Yes N = No)
l*Protocol converter? (1 = 3708 or 3710 8-PA 2 = Reserved)
1200;Line speed (baud rate) to be used?
N;Half duplex? (V = Half duplex N = Full Duplex)
1;Parity? (1 = Odd 2 = Even 3 = Mark 4 = Space)
1;Stop bits? (lor 2)
N;Automatic new line? (V=Ves N=No)
N;Automatic line feed? (V = Yes N = No)
V;Carriage return? (V = CR N = CR-LF)
2;Character sent at end of message? (1 = ETX 2 = CR 3 = EOT 4 = XOFF)
V;Scrolling? (V=Ves N=No)
O;Prompt character from host? (0 = none)
V;START/STOP (XON/XOFF) enabled? (V=Ves N=No)
1;Communications port? (lor 2)
N;25 line terminal definition in 3708 or 3710 8-PA? (V = Yes N = No)
2;Host system? (1 = MVSITSO 2 = VM/CMS 3 = CICS 4 = IWS)
3;lnactivity timeout in minutes? (1 - 9)
112;Extended code for switch to PC-DOS session? (84 - 132)
113;Extended code for switch to host session? (84 - 132)
111;Extended code for switch to file transfer menu? (84 - 132)
110;Extended code for switch to messages screen? (84 - 132)
IND$FILE;Name of host file transfer command?
Figure
D-G
D-l.
IBM3708.SET Standard Configuration
3270 Key
ATTN
Backtab
PC Key
Ctrl a
Backtab
or Esc Tab
CLEAR
Home or Ctrl c
CURSR SEL Esc k
Delete
Del
DEV CNCL
Ctrl x
Down Cursor Down Cursor
DUP
Ctrl d
Enter
Enter
ERASE EOF End
ERASE
Ctrl Home
INPUT
FIELD MARK Ctrl f
HOME
Ctrl PgUp
or Esc h
IDENT
Esc z
Insert mode Ins
or Esc Del
Left Cursor
Left Cursor
New line
Ctrl Enter
or Gtrl j
Null/Blank
Esc n
PA1
Ctrl F1 or Esc,
PA2
Gtrl F2 or Esc.
PA3
Ctrl F3 or Esc /
PF1
F1 or Esc 1
PF2
F2 or Esc 2
PF3
F3 or Esc 3
PF4
F4 or Esc 4
PF5
F5 or Esc 5
PF6
F6 or Esc 6
PF7
F7 or Esc 7
PFB
FB or Esc 8
PF9
F9 or Esc 9
PF10
F10 or Esc 0
Figure
D-2.
3270 Key
PC Key
PF11
PF12
PF13
PF14
PF15
PF16
PF17
PF1B
PF19
PF20
PF21
PF22
PF23
PF24
Alt-F7
Alt-FB
Alt-F9
Alt-F10
Print
Refresh
RESET
Resume
Display
Resume
Printer
Right Cursor
Status On/Off
Suspend
Display
Suspend
Printer
SYS REQ
Tab
Type Ahead
Up Cursor
Shift F1 or Esc Shift F2 or Esc =
Shift F3 or Esc!
Shift F4 or Esc @
Shift F5 or Esc #
Shift F6 or Esc $
Shift F7 or Esc %
Shift FB or Esc /\
Shift F9 or Esc &
Shift F10 or Esc *
Alt F1 or Esc (
Alt F2 or Esc)
Alt F3 or Esc
Alt F4 or Esc +
Switch to Msgs
Switch to FTTERM
Switch to PC DOS
Switch to Host
Ctrl p
Esc r
Gtrl r
Gtrl y
Esc p
Right Cursor
Ctrl w
Ctrl t
Esc
0
Esc s
Tab
Esc t
Up Cursor
3270 and PC Key Definition Chart (IBM3708.SET)
Notes:
1. For keys that begin with Shift, press and hold Shift
and then press the other key. For keys that begin with
Ctrl, press and hold Ctrl and then press the other key.
For keys that begin with Alt, press and hold Alt and
then press the other key.
D-7
2. For keys that begin with Esc, press and release Esc
and then press the other key.
3. Do not use Shift or Caps Lock when pressing a Ctrl,
Alt, or Esc combination.
4. The following keys in the 3270 column are not 3270
functions as such. They are functions of the 3708 or
37108-PA:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Null/Blank
Refresh
Resume Display
Resume Printer
Status On/Off
Suspend Display
Suspend Printer
Type Ahead.
The system administrator for the 3708 or 3710 8-PA can
provide information on these functions.
D-8
Figure
D-3.
IBM3708.SET Special Keys
I)-q
DOWJONES.SET (Dow Jones
News Service)
The DOWJONES.SET file is for. use with the Dow Jones
News Service. It provides for file transfers in native
emulation mode and contains standard 3101 keyboard
functions.
The item in DOW JONES.SET most likely to need
modification is the line speed. Set the line speed to match
the modem.
Figure D-4 shows the standard configuration for
DOWJONES.SET. Figure D-5 lists the key definitions.
WRunning in protocol conversion mode? (Y = Yes N = No)
1*Protocol converter? (1 =3708 or 3710 8-PA 2= Reserved)
1200;Line speed (baud rate) to be used?
N*Half duplex? (Y = Half duplex N = Full Duplex)
2*Parity? (1=Odd 2=Even 3=Mark 4=Space)
1*Stop bits? (1 or 2)
Y* Automatic new line? (Y = Yes N = No)
N* Automatic line feed? (Y = Yes N = No)
V*Carriage return? (Y = CR N = CR-LF)
2*Character sent at end of message? (1 ~EtX- 2';'CR3=EOT -4 XOFF)
Y*Scroliing? (Y = Yes N = No)
O*Prompt character from host? (0 = none)
WSTART/STOP (XON/XOFF) enabled? (Y=Yes N=No)
1;Communications port? (1 or 2)
N*25 line terminal definition in 3708 or 3710 8-PA? (Y = Yes N = No)
1*Host system? (1 = MVS/TSO 2 = VM/CMS 3 = CICS 4 = IWS)
2*lnactivity timeout in minutes? (1 - 9)
112;Extended code for switch to PC-DOS session? (84 - 132)
113;Extended code for switch to host session? (84 - 132)
111 ;Extended code for switch to file transfer menu? (84 - 132)
110*Extended code for switch to messages screen? (84 - 132)
NUL *Name of host file transfer command?
=
Figure
D-IO
D-4.
DOW JONES.SET Standard Configuration
3101 Key
PC Key
Backspace
BREAK
CLEAR
Down Cursor
DEL
ERASE EOLlEOF
ERASE EOS
ERASE INPUT
ESC
HOME
(Alt Backtab)
Left Cursor
LINE FEED
New Line
PF1 through PF8
PRINT
Right Cursor
Tab
Up Cursor
Backspace
PgUp
Home
Cursor Down
Del
End
PgDn
Ctrl Home
Esc
Ctrl PgUp
Figure
D-5.
Cursor Left
Ctrl Enter
Enter
F1 through F8
Shift PrtSc
Cursor Right
Tab
Cursor Up
F9 through F12
3101 and PC Key Definition Chart
(DOW JONES.SET)
Notes:
1. For keys that begin with Shift, press and hold Shift
and then press the other key. For keys that begin with
Ctrl, press and hold Ctrl and then press the other key.
2. The 3101 RESET key does not have a PC equivalent.
When you make an input error, the PC keyboard does
not lock. Instead, the PC beeps and allows you to
continue typing.
3. Block mode 3101 keys, such as INS CHAR, are not
defined because FTTERM emulates a 3101 operating in
character mode only.
D-ll
SOURCE.SET (The Source)
The SOURCE.SET file is for use with The Source
information service. It provides for file transfers in native
emulation mode and contains standard 3101 keyboard
functions.
The items in SOURCE.SET most likely to need
modification are:
•
•
Line speed
Full or half duplex.
Consult the configuration information provided by The
Source.
Figure D-6 shows the standard configuration for
SOURCE.SET. Figure D-7 lists the key definitions.
WRunning in protocol conversion mode? (Y = Yes N = No)
l·Protocol converter? (1 =3708 or 3710 8-PA 2=Reserved)
300;Line speed (baud rate) to be used?
N;Half duplex? (Y = Half duplex N = Full Duplex)
2*Parity? (l=Odd 2=Even 3=Mark 4=Space)
1·Stop bits? (1 or 2)
Y· Automatic new line? (Y = Yes N = No)
N*Automatic line feed? (Y=Yes N=No)
Y·Carriage return? (Y = CR N = CR-LF)
2*Character sent at end of message? (1 = ETX 2 = CR 3 = EOT 4 = XOFF)
Y·Scrolling? (Y=Yes N=No)
10·Prompt character from host? (0= none)
Y·START/STOP (XON/XOFF) enabled? (Y=Yes N=No)
1;Communications port? (lor 2)
N*25 line terminal definition in 3708 or 3710 8-PA? (Y = Yes N = No)
l*Host system? (1 = MVS/TSO 2 = VM/CMS 3 = CICS 4 =: IWS)
2*'nactivity timeout in minutes? (1 - 9)
112;Extended code for switch to PC-DOS session? (84 - 132)
113;Extended code for switch to host session? (84 - 132)
111;Extended code for switch to file transfer menu? (84 - 132)
110*Extended code for switch to messages screen? (84 - 132)
NUL *Name of host file transfer command?
Figure
0-12
D-6.
SOURCE.SET Standard Configuration
3101 Key
PC Key
Backspace
BREAK
CLEAR
Down Cursor
DEL
ERASE EOLlEOF
ERASE EOS
ERASE INPUT
ESC
HOME
(Alt Backtab)
Left Cursor
LINE FEED
New Line
PF1 through PF8
PRINT
Right Cursor
Tab
Up Cursor
Backspace
PgUp
Home
Cursor Down
Del
End
PgDn
Ctrl Home
Esc
Ctrl PgUp
Figure
D-7.
Cursor Left
Ctrl Enter
Enter
F1 through F8·
Shift PrtSc
Cursor Right
Tab
Cursor Up
F9 through F12
3101 and PC Key Definition Chart (SOURCE.SET)
Notes:
-
- ---
--.
1. For keys that begin with Shift, press and hold Shift
and then press the other key. For keys that begin with
Ctrl, press and hold Ctrl and then press the other key.
2. The 3101 RESET key does not have a PC equivalent.
When you make an input error, the PC keyboard does
not lock. Instead, the PC beeps and allows you to
can tin ue typing.
3. Block mode 3101 keys, such as INS CHAR, are not
defined because FTTERM emulates a 3101 operating in
character mode only.
0-13
D-14
Appendix E. IBM 3708 and 3710
8-PA Considerations
About this Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Predefined Terminal Selections for 3708 ........
Changing the Color Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Color Escape Sequences .......
Changing Highlight Selections ..............
Status Line Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple LU Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reserved Key Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-3
E-4
E-4
E-7
E-8
E-9
E-9
E-ll
E-l
Notes:
E-2
About this Appendix
This appendix describes the predefined terminal selections
for FTTERM provided with the 3708. It describes those
items in the terminal definition that a system
administrator can modify. System administrators for a
3710 8-PA can use this information when creating a user
defined terminal (DDT) for FTTERM.
Note:
•
System administrators for 3708: You
do not need to perform any of the
procedures in this appendix unless
you want to customize the
implementation of color or
highlighting in the predefined
terminal selections. When
configuring a port on the 3708 for
one of the predefined terminals,
select the small (80-byte) receive
queue SIze.
•
System administrators faT 3710-8-PA:
This appendix provides information
to help you define a UDT that
supports:
Color or highlighting
Status line on the PC's 25th line
lVlultiple logical units (MLU) on
a single asynchronous port.
The UDT can contain any
combination of these features;
however, both color and highlighting
cannot be supported by the same
UDT. When configuring a port on
the 3710 8-PA for an FTTERM UDT,
select the standard (320-byte) receive
queue SIze.
E-3
Predefined Terminal Selections
for 3708
The predefined terminal selections for the 3708 that
support FTTERM are as follows:
•
IBM PC/FTTERM COLOR
This terminal definition supports the following
features for FTTERM users who have a color monitor:
Four colors to distinguish field attributes
3270 status line on the PC display's 25th line
Multiple logical unit (MLU) support.
•
IBM PC/FTTERM MONO
This terminal definition supports the following
features for FTTERM users who have a monochrome
monitor:
Highlighting to distinguish field attributes
3270 status line on the PC display's 25th line
Multiple logical unit (MLU) support.
Changing the Color Selections
Note: For complete instructions on
modifying terminal definitions and
creating UDTs, see the 3708 or 3710
8-PA documentation listed under
"Related Manuals" on page viii.
The IBlVI PC/FTTER1vl COLOR terminal definition
includes four default escape sequences for controlling PC
E-.t
display colors. Each escape sequence defines the
foreground or background color of a displayed field.
The 3708 determines which escape sequence to send based
on the protection and display bits of field attribute bytes
sent from the host. See the following table:
Field Attribute
Attribute Bit
2 3 4 5
Unprotected, normal intensity
Unprotected, intensified
Protected, normal intensity
Protected, intensified
0
0
1
1
x
x
x
x
0
1
0
1
x
0
x
0
Color
Color
Color
Color
Color
1
2
3
4
The format of the color-change escape sequences is:
ESC [ n1 n2 m
where n1 and n2 specify a pair of digits from Figure E-l.
Notice that a single escape sequence defines only a
foreground or a background color. Therefore, a change in
a display field's attribute bits can cause a change in only
the current foreground or background color on the PC
display, but not both simultaneously.
The n1 n2 pairs 2,0 through 3,7 specify a foreground color
(as indicated by an x in the FG column). The n1 n2 pairs
4,0 through 4,7 specify a background color (as indicated
by an x in the BG column).
E-5
n1 n2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Figure
FG
BG
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
E-l.
Color
Black
Red
Green
Brown (yellow)
Blue
Magenta
Cyan
Light grey
Dark grey
Light red
Light green
Yellow
Light blue
Light magenta
Light cyan
White
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Magenta
Cyan
White
Color Selection Values
Note: The pairs 5,0 to 5,7 are the same
as 2,0 to 2,7 except that blinking is
turned on. The pairs 6,0 to 6,7 are the
same as 3,0 to 3,7 except that blinking is
turned on.
The default color selections for the IBM PCjFTTERM
COLOR terminal definition are shown in the following
table. The ASCII Decimal column shows the decimal
representation of the escape sequence in ASCII.
E-6
Color
1
2
3
4
Description
Escape Seq
3,2
2,4
2,1
3,7
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
(Light green FG)
(Blue FG)
(Red FG)
(White FG)
[
[
[
[
3
2
2
3
2
4
1
7
ASCII Decimal
m
m
m
m
1B
1B
1B
1B
58
58
5B
58
33
32
32
33
32
34
31
37
60
60
60
60
Examples of Color Escape Sequences
To define color 1 as a yellow foreground, the escape
sequence IS:
ESC [ 33m
In decimal ASCII, the escape sequence is:
IB 5B 33 33 6D
To define color 3 as a red background, the escape
sequence IS:
ESC [ 4 1 m
In decimal ASCII, the escape sequence is:
1B 5B 34 31 6D
FTTERM resets the color values only when the user
issues the correct ESC sequence locally or when FTTERM
is reloaded. This implies that, if a user is disconnected
and re~onnecte.d, the host session may contain color from
a preVIOUS seSSIon.
E-7
Changing Highlight Selections
Note: For complete instructions on
modifying terminal definitions or
creating UDTs, see the 3708 or 3710
8-PA doculnentation listed under
"Related ~'lanuals" on page viii.
The IBM PC/FTTERNI MONO terminal definition
includes two escape sequences for controlling highlighting
on monochrome monitors. One escape sequence turns
highlighting on and the other turns highlighting off. The
default display attribute is no highlighting.
The 3708 determines when to turn highlighting on and off
based on the protection and display bits of field attribute
bytes. See the following table:
Field Attribute
Attribute Bit
2 3 4 5
Unprotected, normal intensity
Unprotected, intensified
Protected, normal intensity
Protected, intensified
0
0
1
1
x
x
x
x
0
1
0
1
x
0
x
0
Highlight
Off
On
Off
On
To change the use of highlighting in the IBM
PC/FTTERM MONO terminal definition, or to implement
highlighting in a UDT, use the escape sequences in the
following table. The ASCII Decimal column shows the
decimal representation of the escape sequence in ASCII.
Highlighting
On
Off
Escape Seq
ASCII Decimal
ESC [ 1 m
ESC [ 0 m
18 58 31 60
18 58 30 60
FTTERlYl resets the highlighting values only when the
user issues the correct ESC sequence locally or when
FTTERlYI is reloaded. This implies that, if a user is
disconnected and reconnected, the host session may
contain highlighting from a previous session.
E-8
Status Line Support
Both of the 3708 terminal definitions for FTTERM are
configured to display a simulated 3270 status line on the
25th (bottom) line of the PC display. (This is an
alternative to the method used by the IBM 3101 terminal
definition, which causes positioning the status line on the
24th line. The user then toggles it on and off with
Ctrl W.)
The system administrator for a 3710 8-PA can define a
UDT that provides for a status line on the 25th line by
following this procedure:
1. Define a UDT that uses the 3101 terminal table as a
base.
2. Define byte 1 of the UDT as X' 40', based on the
following information:
•
•
•
FTTERM is not an ANSI X3.64 compatible
terminal.
FTTERM does not require the suppression of
scrolling.
FTTERM does have an addressable 25th line.
Multiple LU Support
Both of the 3708 terminal definitions for FTTERM are
configured to support the display and printer as separate
LUs. Printers attached to the PC are available for local
or system prints just as if they were separately attached to
the 3708.
E-9
System administrators for a 3710 8-PA can take advantage
of this capability by creating a UDT that defines the
following MLU commands:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Start Printer (must be defined as DLE DC2)
Stop Printer (must be defined as DLE DC4)
Suspend Printer (must be defined as Esc 0)
Resume Printer (must be defined as Esc p)
Suspend Display (user defined)
Resume Display (user defined).
When the 3708 or 3710 8-PA has output for the printer, it
sends the Start Printer command and continues until the
user enters data or the printing is finished. It then sends a
Stop Printer command and resumes normal display
operations.
If the printing is interrupting the user too much, the user
can enter the Suspend Printer and Resume Printer
commands. To speed the printing, the user can enter the
Suspend Display and Resume Display commands.
E-l0
Reserved Key Sequences
The following key sequences are used by FTTERM and
must not be redefined in a DDT:
ESC <
ESC>
ESC p
ESC a
DLE DC2
DLE DC4
ESC t
Ctrl c
ESC 2
ESC 1
Ctrlw
File Transfer Disable
File Transfer Enable
Resume Printer
Suspend Printer
Start Printer
Stop Printer
Type Ahead
CLEAR
PF2
PF 1
Status On/Off
E-ll
E-12
Appendix F. 3101 Emulation
Comparison
F-1
Notes:
F-2
This appendix compares FTTERM's 3101 emulation
program and an actual IBM 3101 Display Terminal. It
matches 'the order and section numbering of Chapters 2
and 3 of the 3101 Display Terminal Description.
Chapter 2
2.1 Modes
Only character transfer mode ·is supported, not block
mode.
Only the communication mode is supported, not local
mode.
Only the normal operational mode is supported.
2.1.1 Data Transfer Modes
Only character mode is supported.
Only normal mode is supported, so Figure 2-1 does
not apply.
Figure 2-2 does not apply.
2.1.2 Telecommunication Modes
Local mode is not supported.
2.1.3 Operational Modes
2.1.3.1 Normal Mode
Supported.
2.1.3.2 Transparent Mode
Not supported.
2.1.3.3 Program Mode
Not supported.
F-3
2.2 Display
The display handling is essentially as described except
that users cannot enter display attributes from the
keyboard.
2.2.1 Display Fields
Display fields are essentially as described.
2.2.2 Field Attributes
Field attributes are supported as described in
Appendix E, "IBM 3708 and 3710 8-PA
Considerations. "
2.2.3 Display Screen Buffer Address and Cursor
Address
Supported as described.
2.3 Data Stream
2.3.1 Data Stream Format
Supported, except under "Notes" as follows:
1. Error Symbol and Send Mark are never stored
in buffers, so conversation rules do not
apply.
2. Katakana characters are not supported.
3. Canadian French is not supported.
2.3.2 Data Stream to Printer
Printers attached to a PC running FTTERM can be
defined as a separate logical unit to the 3708 or 3710
8-PA. See the 3708 and 3710 8-PA documentation
listed under "Related Manuals" on page Vlll.
2.4 Data Flow
F-4
Not applicable. Differences are covered elsewhere.
2.5 Telecommunication Operations, States, and
Facilities
Duplex and half duplex terminal operations are supported.
2.5.1 Telecommunication Operating States
2.5.1.1 Duplex Operating State - Character
Mode
Supported as described.
2.5.1.2 Half Duplex Operating State Character Mode
Only duplex telecommunication facilities are
supported by the Asynchronous Communications
Adapter. Thus no receive or transmit states are
needed or supported.
2.5.1.3 Half Duplex - Block Mode
Not supported.
2.5.2 Telecommunication Facilities
Only duplex telecommunication facilities are
supported by the Asynchronous Communications
Adapter.
2.5.2.1 Duplex Telecommunication Facility
When FTTERM is started, DTR and RTS are
turned on. These signals remain on upon exit
from the program and until the system is reset or
power is turned off. When a user presses the
DISC (disconnect) key, DTR is dropped.
2.5.2.2 Half Duplex without Reverse Channel
Not supported.
F-i)
2.5.2.3 Half Duplex with Reverse Channel
Not supported.
2.6 Modems
See "Required Hardware" on page 1-12 for a list of
compatible modem types.
2.7 Commands
The commands (escape sequences) operate as in Figure
2-12, except as follows:
ESC-2 (Back Tab) is not supported.
ESC-3 (Start Field) is not supported.
ESC-6 (Read Status) operates as described, except
that the following bits are permanently set as
indicated:
Status 0 (Byte 2)
Bit 7 (Inverse of 6) = 1
Bit 6 (Communication buffer overflow)
Bit 5 (Line parity detected) = O·
.
Bit 2 (Keyboard locked) = 0
0
Status 1 (Byte 3)
Bit 2 (Program mode) = 0
Bi t 1 (Local mode) = 0
ESC-7 (Read Setup Switch) operates as described,
except that the following bits are permanently set as
indicated:
CSU 0 (Byte 2)
Bit 4 (Permanent RTS) = 1
Bit 3 (Reverse channel) = 0
CSU 1 (Byte 3)
Bit 6 (Dual case) = 1
ESC-8 (Read Buffer) is not supported.
F-6
ESC-9 (Set Control) operates as described, except that
bits 1 and 4 of the control byte are ignored by
FTTERM.
ESC-E (Write Send Mark) is not supported because
SEND MSG is not supported:
ESC-N (Insert Line) is not supported.
ESC-O (Delete Line) is not supported.
ESC-P (Insert Character) is not supported.
ESC-Q (Delete Character) is not supported.
ESC-S (Cancel) is not supported.
ESC-U (Print Line) is not supported.
ESC-V (Print Message) is not supported.
ESC-: (Lock Keyboard) prevents typing in character
mode.
The address codes in Figure 2-13 ar~ d~sGriped wjth_
the US special graphic symbols. The set control
bytes are as described in Figure 2-14.
2.8 Auxiliary Device Operations
The auxiliary device connection is supported as a separate
logical unit by the 3708 or 3710 8-PA. See the
documentation for the 3708 or 3710 8-PA listed under
"Related Manuals" on page viii. In addition, most of the
functions described in this section are supported through
FTTERM operations for receiving/saving files and
screens.
F-7
2.9 System and Status Messages
System and status messages are supported essentially as
described except that verbal descriptions are used instead
of numeric codes. Messages regarding file transfer status
appear on the file transfer menu or Host Messages Screen.
If you enter a SEND or RECEIVE command at the DOS
prompt, the messages appear in the PC DOS session.
Chapter 3
3.1 Logic Element
The PC does not have the lights or the NORMAL/TEST
switch described.
3.1.6 Audible Alarm
The PC does not have a volume control for the
audible alarm.
The audible alarm sounds as described except for the
following:
The NORMAL/TEST switch does not exist.
No logical keyboard lock occurs. However,
when an invalid key is pressed, the alarm sounds
while a message describes why the key is
invalid.
3.2 Video Element - Brightness and Contrast Control
Knobs
On the IBM Monochrome Display, equivalent brightness
and contrast controls are provided. Monitors attached to
the Color/Graphics Adapter may not provide equivalent
controls.
F-8
3.3 Keyboard Element
3.3.1 Setup Switches
The functions in this list are supported by items in
the configuration file.
3.3.1.1 BLOCK/CHAR Switch
Only character mode is supported.
3.3.1.2 HDX/FDX Switch
Half and full duplex are supported for screen
display.
3.3.1.3 Interface Switch
EIA 232-C is the only supported interface.
3.3.1.4 PRTS/CRTS Switch
Only PRTS is supported.
3.3.1.5 REVERSE CH Switch
Not supported.
3.3.1.6 Turnaround Character Switches
Supported in the configuration file.
3.3.1.7 DUAL/MONO Switch
Not supported as such. The PC CAPS LOCK
key pernlits alphabetic keys to be converted to
uppercase. Received characters are displayed as
received.
F-9
3.3.1.8 STOP I/STOP 2 Switch
Supported in the configuration file.
3.3.1.9 Parity Bit Selection Switches
Supported in the configuration file.
3.3.1.10 Send Line Option Switch
Not supported.
3.3.1.11 NULL SUPP Switch
Not supported.
3.3.1.12 TIME-FILL Switches
Not supported.
3.3.1.13 AUTO NL Switch
Supported in the configuration file.
3.3.1.14 AUTO LF Switch
Supported in the configuration file.
3.3.1.15 CR/CR-LF Switch
Supported in the configuration file.
3.3.1.16 SCROLL Switch
Supported in the configuration file.
3.3.1.17 REVERSE VIDEO Switch
Not supported.
F-l0
3.3.1.18 BLINK CURSOR Switch
Not supported.
3.3.1.19 LINE SPEED Switches
Supported in the configuration file.
3.3.1.20 LINE SPEED Switches for Auxiliary
Interface
Not supported.
3.3.2 Keyboard Key Functions
The keyboard layout on the PC is discussed in
"Defining the Keyboard" on page C-30 and
Appendix D, "Sample Configuration Files," in this
manual.
12-Key Numeric Keypad: The PC numeric keypad is
put into effect with the Num Lock key. The default
substitutes for the 3101 PFI through PF8 keys are the
Fl through F8 keys.
Graphic Character Keys: Only US ASCII codes are
supported.
The typematic rate is the standard rate for the PC
and is not dependent on line speed. The PC keyboard
buffer can hold 15 characters.
3.3.2.1 and 3.3.2.2 PRGM MODE Key and
ATTR Key
Not supported.
3.3.2.3 ESC (Escape) Key
Partially supported. See Section 2.7.
3.3.2.4 PRINT lVISG Key
Not supported.
F-l1
3.3.2.5 PRINT LINE Key·
Not supported.
3.3.2.6 PRINT Key
Supported by the FTTERM COPY option.
3.3.2.7 AUX Key
Supported by the FTTERM RECEIVE or SAVE
option.
3.3.2.8 ERASE EOL/EOF Key
Supported.
3.3.2.9 ERASE INPUT Key
Supported.
3.3.2.10 ERASE EOS Key
Supported.
3.3.2.11 CLEAR Key
Supported.
3.3.2.12 SEND MSG Key
Not supported.
3.3.2.13 SEND LINE Key
Not supported.
3.3.2.14 Click Key
Not supported.
F-1 :z
3.3.2.15 LOCAL Key
Not supported.
3.3.2.16 TAB Key
Supported. Default tab stops are in every eighth
column.
3.3.2.17 Shift Lock Key
Partially supported by the CAPS LOCK key.
However, numeric and punctuation keys are not
shifted by CAPS LOCK. Cancel CAPS LOCK by
pressing the CAPS LOCK key again.
3.3.2.18 Shift Key
Supported.
3.3.2.19 RESET Key
Not supported.
3.3.2.20 CANCEL Key
Not supported.
3.3.2.21 Backspace Key
Supported.
3.3.2.22 Back-Tab Key
Supported.
3.3.2.23 New Line Key
Supported by Enter key.
F'-13
3.3.2.24 ALT Key
The PC Ctrl key functions in the same way as
the 3101 ALT key for transmitting control
characters.
Looking at Figure 3-5, the following differences
should be noted:
1. Transparent mode is not supported.
2. The following functions of control characters
are not supported by FTTERM:
NUL. Received NULs do not cause
keyboard lockup.
DLE 8TX and DLE ETX. These do not
control entry to and exit from transparent
mode, because it is not supported.
CR. A CR is typed locally by the Enter key.
SO and 81. ISO 7-bit characters for
Bi-Lingual English/Canadian French. are
not supported.
DCl. No keyboard lock occurs with DCl.
DC2. No send symbol is displayed, because
SEND l'vISG is not supported.
DC3. No keyboard lock occurs with DC3.
SUB. No error symbol is displayed, because
parity errors are not supported.
3.3.2.25 SEND Key
Not supported.
3.3.2.26 DEL Key
Supported.
3.3.2.27 BREAK Key
Supported. Only full duplex communication is
supported. Ignore references to half duplex
communication in this section.
3.3.2.28 HOME Key
Supported.
3.3.2.29 INS CHAR Key
Not supported.
3.3.2.30 INS LINE Key
Not supported.
3.3.2.31 DEL CHAR Key
Supported by DEL key.
3.3.2.32 DEL LINE Key
Not supported.
3.3.2.33 Move-Cursor Keys
Supported.
3.3.2.34 Program Function (PF) Keys
Supported.
F-15
3.3.2.35 Inoperative Keys
Block mode keys are not supported.
3.3.2.36 Dead Keys
Not supported.
F-16
Appendix G. National Language
Considerations
About this Appendix .....................
Why You Select a Character Translation Table.
VM/CMS and MVS/TSO Hosts .............
CICS and IWS Hosts .....................
G-3
G-3
G-4
G-7
G-l
Notes:
G-2
About this Appendix
This appendix explains the purpose of the national
language character translation tables that are present as
files on the FTTERM program diskette. It explains why
users of national language keyboards must select a
character translation table as part of creating a working
copy of FTTERM.
This appendix also lists the character translation tables
used by the host file transfer programs. The tables are
intended for advanced users and system administrators
who want to modify the FTTERM character translation
tables.
Why You Select a Character
Translation Table
In the procedure under "Selecting a Character
Translation Table" on page 2-15, you copied one of the
following files to the FTTERM working disk, while
naming the copy DEFAULT.TBL:
•
•
•
•
•
•
-
CFTRAN.TBL (Canadian French)
FRTRAN.TBL (French)
GRTRAN.TBL (German)
ITTRAN.TBL (Italian)
SPTRAN.TBL (Spanish)
UKTRAN.TBL (United Kingdom English).
(Users of standard US English keyboards should have
skipped that procedure. The USTRAN.TBL file on the
FTTERM program diskette is used only when you want to
configure FTTERM for the standard US English keyboard
after having configured it fot another national language
keyboard.)
G-3
These tables are only used for file transfer in protocol
conversion mode.
When you send an alphanumeric file to an SNA host, the
host translates the characters in the file from the ASCII
codes used by the PC to the EBCDIC codes used by the
host. The host searches one of the tables in this appendix
to decide which EBCDIC code corresponds to each ASCII
code. The opposite process occurs at the host when you
receive an alphanumeric file.
The host ASCII-to-EBCDIC tables were not designed to
support national language keyboards. For example, if a
file contains a pound sterling symbol generated by a UK
English keyboard, the host translates it to a pound sign
(#). FTTERM includes the previously-listed character
translation tables to compensate for this.
Note: This manual lists the host
character translation tables, but not the
FTTERM tables. You can print the
FTTERM tables from the FTTERM
program diskette and edit them if
desired. Comments within the files
explain their format.
VMjCMS and MVSjTSO Hosts
The VM/CMS and MVS/TSO versions of the host file
transfer program IND$FILE use the following translation
tables. The EBCDIC to ASCII table (Figure G-l on
page G-5) is activated when a user specifies the ASCII
option in a RECEIVE command. The ASCII to EBCDIC
table (Figure G-2 on page G-6) is activated when a user
specifies the ASCII option in a SEND command.
G-4
EBCDIC
(Hex)
ASCII
(Hex)
00 - 07
08 - 1F
10 - 17
18 - 1F
20 - 27
28 - 2F
30 - 37
38 - 3F
40 - 47
48 - 4F
50 - 57
58 - 5F
60 - 67
68 - 6F
70 - 77
78 - 7F
80 - 87
88 - 8F
90 - 97
98 - 9F
AO - A7
A8 - AF
BO - B7
B8 - BF
CO - C7
C8 - CF
DO - 07
08 - OF
EO - E7
E8 - EF
FO - F7
F8 - FF
00
97
10
18
80
88
90
98
20
A7
26
BO
20
B8
BA
C2
C3
68
CA
71
01
79
08
EO
7B
48
70
51
5C
59
30
38
Figure
G-l.
01
80
11
19
81
89
91
99
AO
A8
A9
B1
2F
B9
BS
60
61
69
6A
72
7E
7A
09
E1
41
49
4A
52
9F
5A
31
39
02
8E
12
92
82
8A
16
9A
A1
5B
AA
21
B2
7C
BC
3A
62
C4
6B
CB
73
02
OA
E2
42
E8
4B
EE
53
F4
32
FA
03
OB
13
8F
83
8B
93
9B
A2
2E
AB
24
B3
2C
BO
23
63
C5
6C
CC
74
03
DB
E3
43
E9
4C
EF
54
F5
33
FB
9C
OC
90
1C
84
8C
94
14
A3
3C
AC
2A
B4
25
BE
40
64
C6
60
CO
75
04
DC
E4
44
EA
40
FO
55
F6
34
FC
09
00
85
10
OA
05
95
15
A4
28
AD
29
B5
5F
BF
27
65
C7
6E
CE
76
05
DO
E5
45
EB
4E
F1
56
F7
35
FO
86
OE
08
1E
17
06
96
9E
A5
2B
AE
3B
B6
3E
CO
3D
66
C8
6F
CF
77
06
DE
E6
46
EC
4F
F2
57
F8
36
FE
7F
OF
87
1F
1B
07
04
1A
A6
50
AF
5E
B7
3F
C1
22
67
C9
70
DO
78
07
OF
E7
47
ED
50
F3
58
F9
37
FF
EBCDIC to ASCII Translation Table for VMjCl\IS
and MVSjTSO Hosts
G-:")
ASCII
EBCDIC
00 - 07
08 - 1F
10 - 17
18 - 1F
20- 27
28 - 2F
30 - 37
38 - 3F
40 - 47
48 - 4F
50 - 57
58 - 5F
60 - 67
68 - 6F
70 - 77
78 -7F
80 - 87
88 - 8F
90 - 97
98 - 9F
AO - A7
A8 - AF
80 - 87
88 - 8F
CO - C7
C8 - CF DO - 07
08 - OF
EO - E7
E8 - EF
FO - F7
F8 - FF
00
16
10
18
40
40
FO
F8
7C
C8
07
E7
79
88
97
A7
20
28
30
38
41
49
58
68
76
8E
9F
80
88
CA
DC
EE
Figure
G-6
G-2.
01
05
11
19
5A
50
F1
F9
C1
C9
08
E8
81
89
98
A8
21
29
31
39
42
51
59
69
77
8F
AO
81
89
C8
DO
EF
02
25
12
3F
7F
5C
F2
7A
C2
01
09
E9
82
91
99
A9
22
2A
1A
3A
43
52
62
70
78
90
AA
B2
8A
CC
DE
FA
03
08
13
27
78
4E
F3
5E
C3
02
E2
4A
83
92
A2
CO
23
28
33
38
44
53
63
71
80
9A
AB
83
88
CD
OF
F8
37
OC
3C
1C
58
68
F4
4C
C4
03
E3
EO
84
93
A3
6A
24
2C
34
04
45
54
64
72
8A
98AC
84
8C
CE
EA
FC
20 2E
00 OE
3D 32
10 1E
6C 50
60 4B
F5 F6
7E 6E
C5 C6
04 05
E4 E5
4F 5F
85 86
94 95
A4 A5
DO A1
15 06
09 OA
35 36
14 3E
46
47
55 56
65 66
73 74
88 8C
9C- -90 AD AE
85 86
80 8E
CF OA
E8 EC
FD FE
2F
OF
26
1F
70
61
F7
6F
C7
06
E6
60
87
96
A6
07
17
18
08
E1
48
57
67
75
80
9EAF
87
8F
08
ED
FF
ASCII to EBCDIC Translation Table for VM/CMS
and MVS/TSO Hosts
CICS and IWS Hosts
The CICS version of the host file transfer program
IND$FILE and IWS use the following default translation
tables. The EBCDIC to ASCII table (Figure G-3 on
page G-8) is activated when a user specifies the ASCII
option in a RECEIVE command. The ASCII to EBCDIC
table (Figure G-4 on page G-9) is activated when a user
specifies the ASCII option in a SEND command.
Note: In the CICS and IWS
environments, the system administrator
has the option of modifying the default
translation tables. Therefore, users may
not need to use the FTTERM
translation table for their national
language. The system administrator
should advise users when this is the
case.
G-7
EBCDIC
ASCII
00 - 07
08 - 1F
10 - 17
18 - 1 F
20 - 27
28 - 2F
30 - 37
38 - 3F
40 - 47
48 - 4F
50 - 57
58 - 5F
60 - 67
68 - 6F
70 -77
78 - 7F
80 - 87
88 - 8F
90 - 97
98 - 9F
AO - A7
A8 - AF
80 - 87
88 - 8F
CO - C7
C8 - CF
DO - 07
08 - OF
EO - E7
E8 - EF
FO - F7
F8 - FF
00
97
10
18
80
88
90
98
20
A7
26
80
20
88
8A
C2
C3
68
CA
71
01
79
08
EO
78
48
70
51
5C
59
30
38
Figure
G-8
G-3.
01
80
11
19
81
89
91
99
AO
A8
A9
81
2F
89
88
60
61
69
6A
72
7E
7A
09
E1
41
49
4A
52
9F
5A
31
39
02
8E
12
92
82
8A
16
9A
A1
05
AA
21
82
E5
8C
3A
62
C4
68
C8
73
02
OA
E2
42
E8
48
EE
53
F4
32
FA
03
08
13
8F
83
88
93
98
A2
2E
A8
24
83
2C
80
23
63
C5
6C
CC
74
03
08
E3
43
E9
4C
EF
54
F5
33
F8
9C
OC
90
1C
84
8C
94
14
A3
3C
AC
2A
84
25
8E
40
64
C6
60
CO
75
04
DC
E4
44
EA
40
FO
55
F6
34
FC
09
00
85
10
OA
05
95
15
A4
28
AD
29
85
5F
8F
27
65
C7
6E
CE
76
58
DO
50
45
EB
4E
F1
56
F7
35
FO
86
OE
08
1E
17
06
96
9E
A5
28
AE
38
86
3E
CO
3D
66
C8
6F
CF
77
06
DE
E6
46
EC
4F
F2
57
F8
36
FE
7F
OF
87
1F
18
07
04
1A
A6
7C
AF
5E
87
3F
C1
22
67
C9
70
DO
78
07
OF
E7
47
ED
50
F3
58
F9
37
FF
EBCDIC to ASCII Translation Table for CICS and
IWS Hosts
ASCII
EBCDIC
00 - 07
08 - 1F
10 - 17
18 - 1F
20 - 27
28 - 2F
30 - 37
38 - 3F
40 - 47
48 - 4F
50 - 57
58 - 5F
60 - 67
68 - 6F
70 -77
78 - 7F
80 - 87
88 - 8F
90 - 97
98 - 9F
AO - A7
A8 - AF
BO - B7
B8 - BF
CO - C7
C8 - CF
DO - 07
08 - OF
EO - E7
E8 - EF
FO - F7
F8 - FF
00
16
10
18
40
40
FO
F8
7C
C8
07
E7
79
88
97
A7
20
28
30
38
41
49
58
68
76
8E
9F
BO
B8
CA
DC
EE
Figure
G-4.
01
05
11
19
5A
50
F1
F9
C1
C9
08
E8
81
89
98
A8
21
29
31
39
42
51
59
69
77
8F
AD
B1
B9
CB
DO
EF
02
25
12
3F
7F
5C
F2
7A
C2
01
09
E9
82
91
99
A9
22
2A
1A
3A
43
52
62
70
78
90
AA
B2
BA
CC
DE
FA
03
OB
13
27
7B
4E
F3
5E
C3
02
E2
AD
83
92
A2
CO
23
2B
33
3B
44
53
63
71
80
9A
AB
B3
BB
CO
OF
FB
37
OC
3C
1C
5B
6B
F4
4C
C4
03
E3
EO
84
93
A3
4F
24
2C
34
04
45
54
64
72
8A
9B
AC
B4
BC
CE
EA
FC
20
00
3D
10
6C
60
F5
7E
C5
04
E4
BO
85
94
A4
DO
15
09
35
14
46
55
65
73
8B
9C
4A
B5
6A
CF
EB
FO
2E
OE
32
1E
50
4B
F6
6E
C6
05
E5
5F
86
95
A5
A1
06
OA
36
3E
47
56
66
74
8C
90
AE
B6
BE
OA
EC
FE
2F
OF
26
1F
70
61
F7
6F
C7
06
E6
60
87
96
A6
07
17
1B
08
E1
48
57
67
75
80
9E
AF
B7
BF
DB
ED
FF
ASCII to EBCDIC Translation Table for CICS and
I\VS Hosts
G-g
G-IO
Appendix H. Using FTTERM with
ROLM Data Communications
Equipment
About this Appendix .....................
Configuring ROLM Equipment .............
ROLM Integrated Personal Computer Interface
(IPCl) Card .........................
ROLMphone Data Communications Module
(DCM) .............................
ROLM Data Terminal Interface (DT!) ......
ROLM Juniper II Feature ...............
Using FTTERM with ROLM Equipment ......
ROLM IPCI Card, ROLMphone DCM, and
ROLM DTI .........................
ROLM Juniper II Feature ...............
H-3
H-3
H-3
H-3
H-4
H-4
H-5
H-5
H-6
H-l
Notes:
H-2
About this Appendix
This appendix describes procedures for configuring ROLM
data communications equipment for use with FTTER11
and the ROLM Computerized Branch Exchange II (ROLlVl
CBX II).
Configuring ROLM Equipment
ROLM Integrated Personal
Computer Interface (IPCI) Card
Follow these steps to configure the ROLM IPCI card.
Refer to the IPCI card documentation for assistance if
necessary.
1. Set the switch on the IPCI card to the correct
communication port.
2. Install the IPCI card and connect it to a DLI line.
3. Use FTSETUP to create a configuration file as
described in Appendix C, "Creating and Modifying
Configuration Files." The line speed and parity must
match the IPCI dataline configuration. A line speed of
9600 is the highest supported by FTTERM.
ROLMphone Data Communications
Module (DCM)
Follow these steps to configure the ROLMphone DCN!.
Refer to the ROLMphone documentation for assistance if
necessary.
1. Configure the ROLMphone dataline for multispeeds
originate terminal with autobaud on.
H-3
2. Connect the ROLMphone to the PC's asynchronous
communications adapter.
3. Use FTSETUP to create a configuration file as
described in Appendix C, "Creating and Modifying
Configuration Files." A line speed of 9600 is the
highest supported by FTTERM. The parity must
match the ROLMphone dataline configuration.
ROLM Data Terminal Interface (DTI)
Follow these steps to configure the ROLM DTI. Refer to
the DTI documentation for assistance if necessary.
1. Configure the DTI dataline as originate terminal.
Select a line speed and parity. A line speed of 9600 is
the highest supported by FTTERM.
2. Connect the DTI to the PC's asynchronous
communications adapter.
3. Use FTSETUP to create a configuration file as
described in Appendix C, "Creating and Modifying
Configuration Files." The line speed and parity must
match the DTI dataline configuration.
ROLM Juniper II Feature
Follow these steps to configure the ROLM Juniper II
feature. Refer to the Juniper II documentation for
assistance if necessary.
1. Set the switch on the Juniper II adapter card to the
correct communication port.
2. Install the Juniper II adapter card and connect it to a
Juniper Phone.
3. Use FTSETUP to create a configuration file as
described in Appendix C, "Creating and Modifying
Configuration Files." Select a line speed and parity to
match the ASCII host, or port on the 3708 or 3710 8-PA.
H-4
A line speed of 9600 is the highest supported by
FTTERM.
Also in this configuration file, you can add auto-dial
definitions. A comma (,) is the dialing command for
the Juniper II. For example, the sequence ,1234
contacts dataline 1234.
Note: As part of the PC startup
routine, after you load DOS, load the
Juniper II software BEFORE you
load FTTERM.
Using FTTERM with ROLM
Equipment
These sections describe how to use FTTERM with any of
the ROLM equipment discussed in the previous sections.
ROLM IPCI Card, ROLMphone. DC_M_,
and ROLM DTI
Follow these steps to use FTTERM with the ROLM IPCI
Card, ROLMphone DC1tI, and ROLM DTI:
1. Start FTTERM as described in Chapter 2, "Preparing
to Use FTTERM."
2. Load the configuration file you created in the previous
sections, as described under "Loading a Configuration
File" on page 3-18.
3. Press the host session key sequence (Alt FlO).
4. The ROLM CBX II prompts with the message:
CALL, DISPLAY OR MODIFY?
H-;')
5. Enter CALL xxxx
where xxxx is the number of the dataline that you
want to "access.
6. After the ROLM CBX II displays Call Complete, you
may have to press the Enter key to get the 3708 or 3710
8-PA logon screen, if the 3708 or 3710 8-PA is set for
autobaud detect.
7. After establishing the host session, you can return to
the file transfer menu (default is Alt-F8) and perform
file transfers or disconnect from the host (Alt-F6) as
described in this manual.
ROLM Juniper II Feature
Follow these steps to use FTTERM with the ROLM
Juniper II feature:
1. Load the Juniper II software.
2. Start FTTERM as described in Chapter 2, "Preparing
to Use FTTERM."
3. Load the configuration file you created for the Juniper
II feature, as described under "Loading a
Configuration File" on page 3-18.
4. Press the host session key sequence (Alt FlO). If you
added any auto-dial definitions, FTTERM displays the
Auto-Dial Directory. Select the ID number for the
host you want to call.
If you have not added auto-dial sequences, press the
Enter key and then enter a dialing sequence. For
example, enter ,4010 to contact a host on dataline 4010.
The comma (,) is the Juniper II dial command.
H-6
The Juniper II displays:
CONNECTING, PLEASE WAIT
When the Juniper II makes contact with the called
number, the display is cleared.
5. You may have to press the Enter key to get the 370S or
3710 S-PA logon screen, if the 370S or 3710 S-P A is set
for autobaud detect.
.
6. After establishing the host session, you can return to
the file transfer menu (default is Alt-FS) and perform
file transfers or disconnect from the host (Alt-F6) as
described in this manual.
H-7
H·8
Appendix I. Service Registration
I-I
I-2
PC/HOST File Transfer and
Terminal Emulator Program
(FTTERM)
Registration,Card~
,
..,:., ,
..',
The original of this registration card acts as proof of license of FTTERM. The purpose of this
registration card is to assist IBM in providing you with news and information about FTTERM should
IBM deem it be necessary.
To register FTTERM, complete the requested information on the original of this certificate and mail
the certificate using the address and prepaid postage on the reverse side,
IBM extends this offer only to licensees of FTTERM residing in the United States.
Fold here
(Please Print)
Licensee (Individual or Organization Name)
Attn:
(Address)
(City,
County
State
County
State
Zip
(Telephone Number)
(Dealer Name)
(Address)
(City.
(Date of Purchase
(Check One Box)
CJ Send news and Information to my dealer in my name
,'l Send news and Information to me
Diskette Identification Number
(see reverse Side for instructiOns}
6476052
1-
v-I
'uaaJ:Js ODOllAJ1:J311~
a4l uo smadde le4l Jaqwnu l!D!P (L) UaAaS e SI JaqwnN uOlle:J!muapl aua>ls!o lAJ1:J311~ a41
aJa4 PIO::!
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK. N.Y.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
IBM Corporation
Internal Zip G38
P.O. Box 12195
Research Triangle Park. N.C. 27709
Glossary
alphanumeric file. A file
that contains letters, digits,
and other characters, such
as punctuation marks.
application program.
U sed in this lnan ual to
refer to any program
designed to run on the PC.
ASCII. American
National Standard Code for
Information Interchange.
The standard code,
consisting of a character
set using 7-bit coded
characters (8 bits including
parity check). It is used for
exchanging information
among data processing
systems and associated
equipment.
asynchronous. Without
regular time relationship;
unpredictable with respect
to a program's execution.
The PC uses an
Asynchronous
Communication Adapter,
which can send and receive
data asynchronously.
attribute, display. A
property that is assigned to
all or part of a display (for
example, high intensity,
green color, or input not
allowed).
auto-dial definition. A
sequence of characters that
FTTERM users can include
in a configuration file for
sending a dialing sequence
to a modem. The autodial
defini tion usually consists
of the modem dial command
and a telephone number.
AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
A batch file that is
automatically processed
after DOS is loaded.
batch file. A text file that
contains several commands
to be performed in
sequence. PC DOS
processes batch files
containing commands such
as the startup commands
for application programs.
FTTERM processes batch
files containing file transfer
commands.
baud rate. See line speed.
binary file. A file that
contains a sequence of
zeros and ones that are not
meaningful as
human-readable characters.
X-I
Most binary files are
program files that are
meaningful only to the
central processing unit.
buffer. Temporary
holding area for data that
compensates for timing
differences between devices
that are exchanging data.
FTTERM uses buffers for
data being sent and
received during file
transfers.
carrier detect. See
Receive Line Signal Detect.
command ready state.
A state wherein the host is
not currently running a
user program. The
command ready state is
indicated by a message
such as READY on some
hosts; on others, it is
indicated by a blank
screen.
concurrent mode. The
mode in which FTTERM
can operate simultaneously
with other PC application
programs.
configura tion. The
specific way in which
FTTERM operates, as
defined in a configuration
file.
configuration file. A file
created by the FTTERM
X-2
user to define the
characteristics of the
communication line,
keyboard layout, file
transfer mode, and other
details. The FTSETUP
program is used to create
and modify configuration
files.
cursor. A movable marker
that indicates a current
input position on a display
screen.
data set. A collection of
da ta, generally
interchangeable with file.
See also partitioned data
set and sequential data set.
default. A value that is
used by a program when
the user does not make an
explici t choice .. For
example, FTTERM includes
a default keyboard
definition for its 3101
emulation program.
disk. A magnetic medium
used for storing large
amounts of data. Disk is
used in this manual to refer
to 5-1/4 inch diskettes, 3-1/2
inch diskettes, and fixed
disks.
DOS. Disk Operating
System, interchangeable
with PC DOS. DOS
provides the basic
functionality of the PC.
emulation. The imitation
of one computer system by
another. In FTTERM, the
PC emulates an IBM 3101
Display Terminal for the
purpose of communicating
with host computers.
extension. The optional
ending to a PC filename,
consisting of up to three
characters. The extension
must be preceded by a
period.
file transfer. The
exchanging of files between
computers over
communication lines. With
FTTERM, file transfer is
interpreted more broadly to
include the exchanging of
display screens and host
session data.
full duplex. Pertaining to
the simultaneous two-way
communication between the
PC and the host system.
Contrast with half duplex.
used by the Color/Graphics
Adapter, also called
all-paints-addressable mode.
Some programs use this
display mode for drawing
pictures on the display.
FTTERM does not let. you
switch to a host session
from a DOS application
program that is running the
display in graphics mode.
Contrast with text mode.
half duplex. Pertaining to
data transmission that can
occur in only one direction
at a time.
host computer. In this
manual, refers to any
computer with which the
PC communicates while
running FTTERM. The
host computer is usually
thought of.a$ Jl .large
multi-user system, but
another PC can also
function as a host
computer. Also referred to
as host.
full screen programs.
Host programs that directly
control the movement of
the cursor. Files created
wi th the SAVE option
while running such
programs contain cursor
control codes within the
text.
keyboard definition. The
way in which FTTERM
emulates the 3101 keyboard
on the PC. The keyboard
definition is part of the
configuration file.
graphics mode. One of
two general display modes
line speed. The number of
bits per second (baud)
library. A collection of
rela ted files.
X-3
transmitted over a
communication line.
load. To copy a program
or data from disk into the
PC memory.
member. A partition of a
partitioned data set.
modem.
(modulator-demodulator)
A device that converts
computer data into audible
signals for transmission
over communication lines.
native emulation mode.
The mode in which
FTTERM transfers data
one line at a time, used
with ASCII hosts and
certain SNA hosts
nonconcurrent mode.
The mode in which
FTTERM does not allow
you to switch to a PC DOS
session for running PC
programs during a file
transfer.
nonresident mode. The
mode in which FTTERM is
loaded into the same area
of memory as other PC
application prograllls; used
in certain cases where PC
memory is limited.
parity. A method of
testing the accuracy of data
transmission.
X-4
partitioned data set. A
data set in direct access
storage that is divided into
partitions, called members,
. each of which can contain
a program, part of a
program, or data.
Synonymous with program
library.
passthru. An operation
mode of a 3708 or 3710 8-PA
wherein ASCII data is
exchanged through it
without any modification.
path. In this manual,
refers to the designations
for directory and
subdirectory names when
specifying a PC filename.
port. An access point for
data entry or exit.
prompt. A request for
input from the user, often
in the form of a displayed
question.
protocol conversion
mode. The mode in which
FTTERM transfers data as
if it were sets of IBl\1 3270
Display screens. Also
refers to the operating
mode of the 3708 or 3710
8-PA wherein the device
converts SNA data streams
to ASCII data streams.
protocol enveloping. An
operating mode of the 3708
and 3710 8-PA wherein SNA
headers are added to data
sent from an ASCII device
and ASCII-to-EBCDIC
conversion is performed;
SN A headers are removed
on data sent to the ASCII
device and
EBCDIC-to-ASCII
conversion is performed.
Receive Line Signal
Detect. A modem signal
to the DTE indicating that
the modem is receiving a
carrier signal from the
telephone line.
resident mode. The mode
in which FTTERM is
loaded as an extension of
DOS instead of as an
application program.
Resident mode is normal for
FTTERM.
sequential data set. A
data set whose records are
organized on the basis of
their successive physical
posi tions, such as on
magnetic tape.
session. In this manual,
refers to the two excl usi ve
functions of running a PC
application program or PC
DOS utilities (the PC DOS
session) or communicating
with a host (the host
session).
SNA. Systems Network
Architecture. A set of data
formats and rules that
enable reliable data
transfer and control of
network resources.
stop bits. One or two bits
that identify the end of a
transmitted ASCII
character.
system administrator.
A person responsible for
the correct utilization of a
host, 3708, or 3710 8-PA.
temporary storage
queue. A set of data
maintained by CICS in
main memory.
terminal. In this manual,
refers to a device consisting
of a keyboard and a display
screen that is used for
communication with a host
computer.
text mode. One of two
general display modes used
by the Color/Graphics
Adapter. (The
Monochrome Display
Adapter always uses text
mode.) Programs use text
mode to display text and to
draw limited types of
pictures. Contrast with
graphics mode.
user defined terminal.
A set of parameters used by
the. 3708 or 3710 8-P A to
communicate with a type of
X-5
terminal that is not among
its standard selection of
terminals. The system
administrator creates user
defined terminals to take
advantage of FTTERM
capabilities that are not
part of standard 3101
emulation.
window. The temporary
display of information on a
screen that overlays a
section of another display.
X-6
XON/XOFF. A pair of
characters that are used in
some communication
methods to stop the flow of
information (XOFF) and
restart it (XON). A device
sends the XOFF character
when it is temporarily
unable to accept any more
data; it then sends the XON
character when the
condition clears. FTTERM
supports the ASCII
characters DC1 and DC3
for XON and XOFF.
Index
block mode
alphanumeric files 1-5
ASCII host
defini tion 1-4
file transfer 5-3-5-16
ASCII to EBCDIC
character translation
tables G-4
Auto-Dial Directory
accessing 3-9
creating C-24
AUTOEXEC.BAT file 3-4,
3-23
automatic line feed C-19
automatic new line C-18
batch files
processing multiple
transfer commands
See batch transfer
files
starting FTTERM
from 3-23
batch transfer files
creating 4-35
errors in 4-37
processing 4-36
stopping
processing 4-39
baud rate 5-8, C-17
binary files 1-5, 5-16
F-3
carriage return C-19
CFTRAN.TBL file 2-14,
2-15
character mode F-3
character sets 2-15, G-3
CICS hosts
command reference 4-46
file transfer
messages A-35
required software 1-14
selecting C-21
color display support
(3708j3710-8-P-A) -E-4 COLOR key sequence B-6
color support 1-11, B-6
commands
edi ting 3-22
entering from DOS
prompt 4-39
repeating 3-22, B-6
communications port
select C-20
COMljCONI2 select C-20
concurrent mode 1-8, 3-17
configuration files
creating C-8
displaying current 3-19
general information C-4
loading
temporarily 3-18
modifying C-12
X-7
sample files D-3
selecting default C-41
worksheetC-13
COPYFILS.BAT file 2-15
copying FTTERM 2-3-2-13
cursor action during host
session C-18
DCM (ROLM) H-3
DC1/DC3 pacing 5-7, C-20
default configuration
file 2-17, C-41
default keyboard
definitions C-31
DEFAULT.SET file 2-14,
C-42
DEFAULT.TBL file 2-15,
2-16
.
dialing a host 3-7, C-24
DISC key sequence B-7
See also disconnecting
from a host session
disconnecting from a host
session 3-20
DOWJONES.SET file 2-14,
D-10
downloading host file to' PC
native emulation 5-7
protocol
conversion 4-24
DTI (ROLM) H-4
X-8
EBCDIC to ASCII
character translation
tables G-4
editing file transfer
commands 3-22
emulation
definition 1-5
3101 keyboard C-31
3101 technical
reference F-3
3270 keyboard C-31
end -of-message
character C-19
error messages
See messages
Establish Connection
message 3-7
exiting from
FTTERM 3-24
file to file transfer
native emulation 5-7,
5-11
protocol conversion 4-8,
4-24
file to printer transfer
native emulation 5-7,
5-11
protocol
conversion 4-15, 4-30
file transfer
See also native
emulation and protocol
conversion
messages A-3
methods 1-4
native emulation 5-16
SAVE command 5-7,
5-11
TRA.NS1tIIT
comlnand 5-12
protocol conversion
batch transfer
files 4-35
RECEIVE
command 4-22
SEND command
sources and
destinations 1-6
File Transfer Main Menu
(protocol conversion)
accessing 3-4
BATCH option 4-35
function key
definitions 3-11
LOAD option 3-18
MODE option 3-17
RECEIVE option 4-21
SEND option 4-6
summary B-3
File Transfer Main Menu Native Emulation
accessing 3-5
COpy option 5-14
function key
definitions 3-11
LOAD option 3-18
l'vIODE option 3-17
SAVE option 5-7
summary B-9
TRANSMIT option 5-11
file transfer services 3-15
FILECONV.EXE file 2-14
foreign character
sets 2-15, G-3
French character set 2-15,
G-3
FRTRAN.TBL file 2-14,
2-15
FT.HLP file 2-14
FTSETUP program
See configuration files
FTSETUP.EXE file 2-14
FTTERM
definition 1-3
exiting from 3-24
making a working
copy 2-3
menu summary B-3
messages A-3
starting 3-3
FTTERM key
sequence B-7
defining C-22
FTTERM reserved key
sequences E-11
FTTERM.EXE file 2-14
full duplex (configuration
file) C-17
full duplex (modem) 3-8
German character set 2-15,
G-3
GRTRAN.TBL file 2-14,
2-15
half duplex (configuration
file) C-17
half duplex (modem) 3-8
hardware
requirements 1-12
HELP key sequence B-6
See also help windows
help windows 3-20, C-7
X-9
highlighting support
(3708/3710 8-PA) E-8
host computer
See ASCII host, SNA
host
host considerations
CICS command
reference 4-46
IWS command
reference 4-46
MVS/TSO command
reference 4-43
required software 1-14
VM/CMS command
reference 4-41
HOST key sequence B-8
defining C-22
host messages screen 3-16
host session
concurrent
functions 3-15
disconnecting from 3-20
file transfer program
name C-23
. logging off 3-20
logging on 3-7, 3-10
starting 3-6
IBM3708.SET file 2-14, D-5
inactivity timeout C-21
IPCI/IPCI AT card
(ROLM) H-3
Italian character set 2-15,
G-3
ITTRAN.TBL file 2-14,
2-15
IWS hosts
command reference 4-46
file transfer
messages A-21
X-IO
required software
selecting C-21
Juniper II (ROLM)
1-14
H-4
key sequences for session
switching 3-11
defining C-22
keyboard definition
adding a key
definition C-35
default C-31
deleting a key
defini tion C-38
listing all key
defini tions C-40
meaning 1-10 -- .
modifying a key
definition C-34
redefinable keys C-34
wait function C-37
language
considerations 2-15, G-3
line feed, automatic C-19
line speed 5-7, C-17
loading a temporary
configuration file 3-18
logging on
host session 3-7,3-10
3708 and 3710 8-PA 3-9
nonresident mode
See resident mode
making a working copy of
FTTERM 2-3-2-13
memory requirements 1-12
messages
file transfer general
reference A-3
FILECONV
program 5-21
from host during batch
file transfer 3-16
FTSETUP
program C-43
help 3-20
modem user
considerations 3-8, C-24
MSGS key sequence B-7
defining C-22
multiple logical unit
support (UDT) E-9
MVSjTSO hosts
command reference 4-43
file transfer
messages A-35
required software 1-14
selecting C-21
national language
character
sets 2-15 ' G-3
.
natIve emulation
definition 1-4
file transfer
procedures 5-3-5-16
selecting C-16
new line, automatic C-18
nonconcurrent mode
See concurrent mode
parity C-18
PC DOS key sequence B-8
defining C-22
PC DOS session 3-14
entering SEND and
RECEIVE commands
from 4-39
restrictions on
swi tching 3-14
PF key definitions C-31
port select C-20
printing a host file 4-30,
5-9
printing a host
screen 4-34, 5-15
printing PC DOS file 4-15
printing PC DOS
screen 4-17
prompt charac'te-r 'C-20protocol conversion
definition 1-4
file transfer
procedures 4-3-4-61
selecting C-16
,protocol converter
See 3708 and 3710 8-PA,
RAM requirements 1-12
RECEIVE command
entering 4-22
entering from DOS
prompt 4-39
X-II
examples 4-27
formats 4-24
host file from host
screen' 4-32
host file to PC
printer 4-30
host screen to PC
printer 4-34
multiple commands
See batch transfer
files
options 4-24
PC DOS file from host
file 4-24
PC DOS file from PC
DOS screen 4-29
Receive Command
Format window 4-23
terminating 4-28
Receive Command Format
window 4-23
receive queue size
(3708/3710 8-PA) E-3
RECEIVE.COM file 2-14
receiving files
See file transfer
See RECEIVE command
See SAVE command
See TRANSMIT
command
repeating file transfer
commands 3-22
requirements
hardware 1-12
software 1-14
reserved key sequences,
FTTER:NI E-11
reserved words 3-26
resident mode 3-24
RETRIEVE key
sequence B-6
RETURN key
sequence B-6
X-12
ROLM CBX II
interfacing DCM to H-3
in terfacing DTI to H-4
interfacing IPCI/IPCI
AT card to H-3
interfacing Juniper II
to H-4
required hardware 1-13
sample configuration
files D-3
SAVE command 5-7
entering 5-8
examples 5-11
scan codes C-22
screen to file transfer 4-29,
4-32
native emulation 5-14
protocol
conversion 4-18, 4-20
screen to printer transfer
native emulation 5-14
protocol
conversion 4-17, 4-34
scrolling C-19
SEND command
en tering 4-6
entering from DOS
prompt 4-39
examples 4-13
formats 4-9
host screen to host
file 4-18
multiple commands
See batch transfer
files
options 4-9
PC DOS file to host
file 4-8
PC DOS file to PC
printer 4-15
PC DOS screen to host
file 4-20
PC DOS screen to PC
printer 4-17
Send Command Format
window 4-7
terminating 4-14
Send Command Format
window 4-7
SEND.COM file 2-14
sending files
See file transfer
See SEND command
serial port select C-20
session switching
See switching between
seSSIons
SNA host
character translation
tables G-4
definition 1-4
file transfer program
name C-23
operating systems
supported by
FTTERM 1-5
selecting C-21
software requirements 1-14
SOURCE. SET file 2-14,
D-12
Spanish character set 2-15,
G-3
SPTRAN.TBL file 2-14,
2-15
start/stop
transmission C-20
starting a host session 3-6
starting FTTERM
in AUTOEXEC.BAT
file 3-23
in nonresident
mode 3-24
normal procedure 3-3
status line support
(UDT) E-9
stop bits C-18
switching between
sessions 3-11
defining key
sequences C-22
key sequences 3-11
terminal emulation
See emulation
terminal selection
(3708/3710 8-PA) E-3
timeout, inactivity C-21
toggling between
concurrent and
nonconcurrent mode 3-17
transferring. files
See file transfer
TRANSMIT command 5-11
UKTRAN.TBL file 2-14,
2-15
United Kingdom character
set 2-15, G-3
uploading PC DOS file to
host
native emulation 5-11
protocol conversion 4-8
user defined terminal C-21
USTRAN.TBL file 2-14,
2-15
X-l3
I'Numerics I
VM/CMS hosts
command reference 4-41
file transfer
messages A-35
required software 1-14
selecting C-21
wait function in key
definitions C-37
XON/XOFF pacing
C-20
X-14
5-7,
25th line support
(DDT) E-9
3101 Display Terminal
See emulation
3270 Display Terminal
See emulation
3708 and 3710 8-PA
disconnecting from 3-20
logging on 3-9
receIve queue sIze E-3
selecting C-17
terminal selections E-3
user defined
terminal C-21
-- ------------_.-
--
May 15, 1987
To: Owners of the IBM PC/HOST File Transfer and Terminal
Emulator Program (FTTERM)
From: IBM FTTERM Product Development
Subj: Notification of an FTTERM Engineering Change (EC)
No. 6476152 to IBM PN 6476052
This package contains:
•
•
•
A 10 page letter
One 3.5 inch diskette
One 5.25 inch diskette.
Dear FTTERM Owner:
Enclosed is a new diskette for your .copy .of the laM
PC/HOST File Transfer and Terminal Emulator Program
(FTTERM). This diskette contains changes that will
significantly improve performance. It also contains other
functional enhancements and problem resolutions. Many of
the enhancements involve FTSETUP questions; however,
reconfiguration is not required. If you do not perform any
setup changes, FTTERM should operate as it has in the past.
Please read these pages before using the new diskette. They
tell you about the changes and installation procedure. When
you finish using this letter, store it in your IBM PC/HOST File
Transfer and Terminal Emulator Program User's Guide and
Reference binder.
This letter covers three major topics:
•
•
•
FTTERM Function Additions
FTTERM Code Fixes
Installation Procedures.
FTTERM Engineering Change No. 6476152, May 1987
1
FTTERM Function Additions
The FTTERM code has been enhanced to provide the
following:
•
•
.•
•
•
•
Improved Performance
New IBM PC Support
New ROLM Support
19.2 Kbps Support
Additional Startup Options
Expanded Auto-dial Support.
Improved Performance
Significant changes have been made to improve IBM
3708jFTTERM performance. For maximum performance
improvements, the 3708 needs to be at microcode level A58787.
Improvements include:
•
•
•
Faster Screen Painting
Faster File Transfers
Reduced Chance of PC Buffer Overrun.
New IBM PC Support
FTTERM now supports the following IBM PCs:
•
•
•
2
IBM Personal Systemj2 Model 30
IBM Personal Systemj2 Model 50
IBM Personal Systemj2 Model 60.
FTTERM Engineering Change No. 6476152, May 1987
Two setup questions have been expanded in FTSETUP to
support the capabilities of the new PCs:
•
LINE SPEED
FTSETUP now accepts a line speed of 19200 bps to take
advantage of the faster ASYNC speed available in the IBM
Personal System/2 Models 50 and 60.
•
Communication Port
FTSETUP now accepts values of 3 and 4 to take
advantage of the four communication ports available in the
IBM Personal System/2 Models 50 and 60.
New ROLM Support
FTTERM supports connection to a ROLMphone 244PC
Feature when communicating through a ROLM Computerized
Branch Exchange (CBX) II.
Configuring the ROLMphone 244PC Feature
Follow these steps to configure the ROLMphone 244PC
Feature. Refer to the ROLMphone 244PC User's Guide for
assistance, if necessary.
1. Connect the ROLMphone 244PC to the PC's ASYNC
communication port.
2. Use FTSETUP to create a configuration file (see Appendix
C of the IBM PCI HOST File Transfer and Terminal
Emulator Program User's Guide and Reference). Select a
line speed and parity to match the ASCII host or 3708 port
you are using. Maximum speed supported is 19.2 Kbps.
Auto-dial definitions can also be set up through the
configuration file. These definitions are the same as those
when using an Attention Command Set modem.
3. Configure the ROLM dataline as you would for a ROLM
Cypress terminal.
FTTERM Engineering Change No. 6476152, May 1987
3
F'eature
Follow these steps to use FTTERM with the ROLMphone
244PC Feature:
1. Start FTTERM.
Note: The ROLMphone 244PC Utility Program can not
be run while FTTERM is resident in memory.
2. Load the FTTERM configuration file that you have
defined for the ROLM phone 244PC connection.
3. Press the host session key sequence (Alt-FIO). If you have
auto-dial sequences defined, FTTERM will display the
Auto-Dial Directory. Select the ID number for the host
you want to call.
If you have not added auto-dial sequences, press the Enter
key and then enter a dialing sequence. For example, enter
A TDT 4010 to contact the host on dataline 4010.
The ROLMphone 244PC displays a CONNECT message
when it makes contact with the called number.
4. If connected to a 3708 port defined for autobaud, press the
Enter key to connect to the 3708.
5. After establishing the host session, you can return to
FTTERM (Alt-F8) and perform file transfers.
19.2 Kbps Support
FTTERM supports 19200 bps communication on the following
devices:
.
•
•
•
4
IBM Personal System/2 Model 50
IBM Personal System/2 Model 60
ROLMphone 244PC.
FTTERM Engineering Change No. 6476152, May 1987
Additional Startup Options
Three new startup options are supported by FTTERM. These
options allow you to bypass some of the FTTERM screens
that' require manual input. The new options are:
•
FTTERM F or FTTERM f - causes FTTERM to bypass
the IBM logo screen and go directly to the FTTERM main
menu.
•
FTTERM H or FTTERM h - causes FTTERM to bypass
the IBM logo screen and go directly to the host session.
•
FTTERM D or FTTERM d - causes FTTERM to bypass
the IBM logo screen and go directly to the PC DOS
session.
The new startup options can be specified when FTTERM is
loaded in resident or non-resident mode .. For example,
'FTTERM h' will load FTTERM as a resident extension of
DOS, bypass both the IBM logo screen and the FTTERM
main menu, and take you to the host session. 'FTTERM n h'
will load FTTERM in non-resident mode and take you directly
to the host session.
Expanded Auto-dial Support
Auto-dial support has been enhanced to support:
•
•
•
A WAIT function
A PAUSE function
Increased auto-dial lengths.
WAIT Function
The WAIT function causes FTTERM to wait until a specified
character is received from the host or modem. For example,
the following sequence will issue a dial command to a
programmable modem and wait for the 'T' in the 'CONNECT'
response:
ATDT5557378 < NEWLINE> < WAIT> T
FTTERM Engineering Change No. 6476152, May 1987
5
The WAIT function is specified in the auto-dial definition by
pressing ALT-W or ALT-w.
PAUSE Function
The PAUSE function causes FTTERM to delay one second
before transmitting the rest of the auto-dial sequence. This
function is especially useful when systems, such as the Dow
J ones News Service 1, require two ENTER keys to be pressed
consecutively. Often a delay needs to be inserted between the
two ENTERs. For example,
<NEW LINE> <PAUSE> <NEW LINE>
PA USE commands can be concatenated to obtain longer delay
periods. For example, < PAUSE> < PAUSE> < PAUSE>
will delay for three seconds.
PAUSE is specified by pressing ALT-P or ALT-p. The
PA USE function is also supported in key definitions.
Auto-dial Lengths
FTTERM can now support auto-dial lengths of up to 100
characters. The previous length maximum was 35.
FTTERM Code Fixes
The FTTERM code has been fixed to solve the following
problems:
•
Receive Buffer Overrun During Native Mode Downloads
FTTERM now transmits an XOFF during native mode
downloads before its receive buffer is overrun.
Dow Jones News Service is a registered trademark of Dow Jones &
Company, Inc.
6
FTTERM Engineering Change No. 6476152, May 1987
Previously, if no host prompt character was defined,
FTTERM could experience a receive buffer overrun when
downloading files in native mode at high speeds.
•
Batch Only File Transfers in TSO
FTTERM now transmits requests for file transfers to TSO
correctly. Previously, if the 25th line was defined,
FTTERM could delete the options specified on a file
transfer request to TSO.
•
Receive Buffer Overrun During MLU Operations
FTTERM now handles Form Feeds transmitted to a MLU
printer. Previously, a Form Feed transmitted to a MLU
printer could cause an overrun of the PC's receive buffer.
•
Timeouts on CICS Batch File Transfers
FTTERM now handles batch file transfers to CICS.
Previously, when using a PC DOS batch file to perform file
transfers to CICS, FTTERM would experience host
timeouts.
Installation Procedures
The following files were changed by this EC:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FTTERM.EXE
FTTERM.HLP
FTSETUP.EXE
FTSETUP.HLP
SEND.COM
RECEIVE. COM
README2.DOC
COPYFILS.BAT
In addition to these files, a new configuration file.
IBMIN.SET, is provided for those users of the IBM
Information Network.
FTTERM Engineering Change No. 6476152,
~lay
1987
7
To install this EC level of code, turn on the PC in the normal
manner using your current FTTERM working diskette or fixed
disk file. Then, follow the procedure listed below for the type
. of system 'you are using:
•
•
•
One - Drive Systems
Two- Drive Systems
Fixed Disk Systems.
Procedure for One - Drive Systems
1. Place the FTTERM EC (PN 6476152) diskette in drive A
of your PC.
2. Change the current drive from A: to B: by entering:
B:
You will see:
A>B:
Insert diskette for drive B: and
strike any key when ready
3. Prepare to copy the FTTERM EC files from the EC
diskette to your working FTTERM diskette by entering:
A:COPYFILS
You will see:
B>A:COPYFILS
Insert diskette for Drive A: and
strike any key when ready
As the FTTERM EC files are copied from the FTTERM
EC diskette to your working diskette, you will be prompted
to exchange diskettes several times. Remember:
•
•
The diskette for drive A: is the FTTERM EC diskette
The diskette for drive B: is your copy of the FTTERM
working diskette.
When copying is finished, the B> prompt appears.
8
FTTERM Engineering Change No. 6476152, May 1987
4. Your FTTERM working diskette now contains the EC
level of code.
Procedure for Two - Drive Systems
1. Place the FTTERM EC (PN 6476152) diskette in drive A
of your PC.
2. Place your copy of the FTTERM working diskette in
drive B.
3. Change the current drive from A: to B: by entering:
B:
You will see:
B>
4. Copy the FTTERM EC files from the ECdiskette to your
working FTTERM diskette by entering:
A:COPYFILS
When copying is finished, the B > prompt appears.
5. Your FTTERM working diskette now contains the EC
level of code.
Procedure for Fixed Disk Systems
1. Place the FTTERM EC (PN 6476152) diskette in drive A
of your PC.
2. Copy the FTTERM EC files from the EC diskette to your
fixed disk by en tering:
A:COPYFILS
When copying is finished, the C> prompt appears.
FTTERM Engineering Change No. 6476152, May 1987
9
Note: COPYFILS will copy the FTTERM files into the
root directory of the fixed disk (C:\). You may substitute a
path to an existing subdirectory by editing the COpy
commands used in the COPYFILS.BAT file.
3. Your fixed disk now contains the EC level of code.
International Business Machines Corporation
Department G38
P.O. Box 12195
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709
SX27-3819-0
PN 6476152
10
FTTER11 Engineering Change No. 6476152, May 1987
(
Download PDF

advertising